Difference between revisions of "SOP-42Q-MES0075 CMMS Spare Parts"

From 42Q
Jump to navigation Jump to search
 
(62 intermediate revisions by 3 users not shown)
Line 7: Line 7:
  
 
 
 
 
<center>'''CMMS'''</center> <center>'''Spare Parts'''</center> <center>'''Version MES15.80'''</center> <center>'''Revision E1'''</center> <center>&nbsp;</center> <center>&nbsp;</center>  
+
<center>'''CMMS'''</center> <center>'''Spare Parts'''</center> <center>'''Version MES15.82'''</center> <center>'''Revision E1'''</center> <center>&nbsp;</center> <center>&nbsp;</center>  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts">Spare Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
+
&nbsp;
 
 
The Spare Parts portal of CMMS provides a comprehensive tracking system to manage the parts needed to maintain a plant’s assets. Administrators and operators receive, issue, and return parts; maintain warehouse stock; create purchase orders; and manage vendor information.<br/> &nbsp;
 
 
 
1. There are 15&nbsp;submodules located within Spare Parts:
 
 
 
*Part List
 
*Company
 
*Receive Parts
 
*Issue Parts
 
*Return Parts
 
*Adjust Parts
 
*Subinventory
 
*Scrap Parts
 
*Reuse Parts
 
*Cycle Count
 
*Inventory View
 
*Transfer Parts
 
*Transaction Logs
 
*Purchase Request
 
*Part Category
 
  
2. To navigate: '''Production > CMMS >&nbsp;Spare Parts'''
+
= <span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts">Spare Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> =
  
'''Figure 1: Navigate to Spare Parts Module'''
+
The Spare Parts portal of CMMS provides a comprehensive tracking system to manage the parts needed to maintain a plant’s assets. Administrators and operators receive, issue, and return parts; maintain warehouse stock; create purchase orders; and manage vendor information.
  
[[File:Figure 1- Navigate to Spare Parts.png|border|800px|RTENOTITLE]]
+
To navigate: '''Production > CMMS >&nbsp;Spare Parts'''
  
&nbsp;
 
  
&nbsp;
 
  
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts_Submodule_Icons"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts_Submodule_Icons"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts_Submodule_Icons"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts_Submodule_Icons"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts_Submodule_Icons"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts_Submodule_Icons">Spare Parts Submodule Icons</span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts_Submodule_Icons"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts_Submodule_Icons"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts_Submodule_Icons"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts_Submodule_Icons"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts_Submodule_Icons"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts_Submodule_Icons"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts_Submodule_Icons"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts_Submodule_Icons"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts_Submodule_Icons"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts_Submodule_Icons"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts_Submodule_Icons"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts_Submodule_Icons"><span class="mw-headline" id="Spare_Parts_Submodule_Icons">Spare Parts Submodule Icons</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
  
 
User-friendly icons help users navigate through the Spare Parts portal.
 
User-friendly icons help users navigate through the Spare Parts portal.
  
&nbsp;
+
'''Figure 1: Spare Parts Main Page'''
 
 
'''Figure 2: Spare Parts Main Page'''
 
 
 
'''[[File:Spare Parts Main Page.png|border|800px|RTENOTITLE]]'''
 
  
&nbsp;
+
'''[[File:Spare Parts main icons.png|border|1000px|RTENOTITLE]]'''
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
Line 61: Line 35:
  
  
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List_Submodule">Part List Submodule&nbsp;</span></span></span></span></span></span></span>[[File:Part List4.png|90px|RTENOTITLE]] ===
+
= <span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List_Submodule">Part List &nbsp;[[File:Part list icon1.png|Part list Icon.png]]</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> =
  
 
Within the '''Part List''' submodule, users can view all parts pertaining to site equipment and machinery, and perform functions related to those parts.
 
Within the '''Part List''' submodule, users can view all parts pertaining to site equipment and machinery, and perform functions related to those parts.
 
&nbsp;
 
  
 
1. Users can complete the following actions in the '''Part List''' submodule:
 
1. Users can complete the following actions in the '''Part List''' submodule:
  
 
*'''Search/Filter''' part entries  
 
*'''Search/Filter''' part entries  
*'''Add''' parts  
+
*'''Add/Bulk Upload'''&nbsp;parts  
 
*'''Edit''' parts  
 
*'''Edit''' parts  
 
*'''Export''' parts  
 
*'''Export''' parts  
Line 78: Line 50:
 
*'''QOH''': Quantity on Hand  
 
*'''QOH''': Quantity on Hand  
 
*'''QIT''': Quantity in Transit  
 
*'''QIT''': Quantity in Transit  
*'''Qty UOM''': Quantity Unit of Measure: UOMs enable plants to quantify and track inventory items according to their packaging. For example, singular parts are listed as '''EA''' (each), while parts that remain packaged together are noted as '''PAK'''. Refer to the'''&nbsp;[[#Glossary_of_Terms|Glossary of Terms]]''' within this work instruction for more details.
+
*'''Qty UOM''': Quantity Unit of Measure: UOMs enable plants to quantify and track inventory items according to their packaging. For example, singular parts are listed as '''EA''' (each), while parts that remain packaged together are noted as '''PAK'''.&nbsp;  
  
&nbsp;
 
  
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List">Search/Filter Part List</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ====
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Part_List">Search/Filter Part List</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
 
1.&nbsp;Users may search for specific parts according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the '''Part List''' Submodule:
 
1.&nbsp;Users may search for specific parts according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the '''Part List''' Submodule:
Line 90: Line 61:
 
*'''Manufacturer''': Select a '''Manufacturer&nbsp;'''<span style="font-size: 13.28px;">from the drop-down list.</span>  
 
*'''Manufacturer''': Select a '''Manufacturer&nbsp;'''<span style="font-size: 13.28px;">from the drop-down list.</span>  
 
*'''Model''': Search for a specific Model.  
 
*'''Model''': Search for a specific Model.  
*<span style="font-size: 13.28px;">'''Active/Inactive/All''': Search by Active or Inactive or all Part Numbers.</span>  
+
*<span style="font-size: 13.28px;">'''Active''': Search by Active or Inactive or all Part Numbers.</span>  
 
*<span style="font-size: 13.28px;">'''Project''': Search by Project associated with the product the Asset builds. Projects are defined in [[SOP-5-I-MES0073-C_CMMS_Admin#Project|CMMS Admin > Project]].</span>  
 
*<span style="font-size: 13.28px;">'''Project''': Search by Project associated with the product the Asset builds. Projects are defined in [[SOP-5-I-MES0073-C_CMMS_Admin#Project|CMMS Admin > Project]].</span>  
  
Line 97: Line 68:
 
3. Select the '''search icon''' (e.g. magnifying glass).
 
3. Select the '''search icon''' (e.g. magnifying glass).
  
&nbsp;
+
'''Figure 2: Part List Screen'''
 
 
'''Figure 4: Part List Filtering Options'''
 
  
[[File:Figure 4 Part List Filtering Options.png|1000px|Figure 4 Part List Filtering Options.png]]
+
[[File:Figure 2- Part List Screen1.png|border|800px|Figure 4 Part List Filtering Options.png]]
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
'''Figure 5: Part List Screen Example'''
+
3. The figure above shows a typical part list and its subsequent categories.<br/> '''<u>Note</u>''': The Column "AVL's" ('''Available Vendor List''')&nbsp;is highlighted. In an effort to keep costs low, plants are encouraged to monitor warehouse inventory. Because plants can easily purchase necessary parts from Approved Vendors it is advisable to maintain an updated and complete list of multiple vendors in case of unexpected problems. <span style="color:#FF0000;">Red</span> cells indicate that only one vendor is available. <span style="color:#DAA520;">Yellow</span> cells indicate 2 vendors, and <span style="color:#00FF00;">Green</span> cells indicate 3 or more. Because this information is critical to busy plant administrators, it is highlighted for easy reference.
  
[[File:Figure 5 Part List Screen Example.png|1000px|Figure 5 Part List Screen Example.png]]
+
&nbsp;
  
3. The figure above shows a typical part list and its subsequent categories.<br/> 4.&nbsp;'''<u>NOTE</u>''': The Column "AVL's" ('''Available Vendor List''')&nbsp;is highlighted. In an effort to keep costs low, plants are encouraged to monitor warehouse inventory. Because plants can easily purchase necessary parts from Approved Vendors it is advisable to maintain an updated and complete list of multiple vendors in case of unexpected problems. <span style="color:#FF0000;">Red</span> cells indicate that only one vendor is available. <span style="color:#DAA520;">Yellow</span> cells indicate 2 vendors, and <span style="color:#00FF00;">Green</span> cells indicate 3 or more. Because this information is critical to busy plant administrators, it is highlighted for easy reference.
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part">Add a Part</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
 
 
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part">Add a Part</span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ====
 
  
 
To '''add''' a part to the '''Part List''':
 
To '''add''' a part to the '''Part List''':
  
1. Select '''Add''' from the '''Part List''' menu. The '''Add a New Part Number''' pop-up window displays, which is comprised of five&nbsp;tabs: '''General''', '''Alternative Parts''', '''Sub Inventory & Locator''', '''Part Categories''', and '''AVL (Approved Vendor List)'''.
+
1. Select '''Add''' from the '''Part List''' menu. The '''Add a New Part Number''' pop-up window displays.
  
&nbsp;
+
'''Figure 3: Add a New Part Number Window'''
  
===== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_General_Tab">Add Part List: General Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span></span> =====
+
[[File:Figure 3- Add Parts.png|border|800px]]
 
 
'''Figure 6: Add a New Part Number Window'''
 
 
 
[[File:Figure 6 Add A New Part Number Window.png|RTENOTITLE]]
 
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
<br/> Within the '''General''' tab, complete the following fields.&nbsp;Fields noted with a <span style="color:#FF0000;">red asterisk *</span> are Mandatory.
+
Complete the following fields.&nbsp;Fields noted with a <span style="color:#FF0000;">red asterisk *</span> are Mandatory.
  
 
*<span style="color:#FF0000;">'''*'''</span>Enter a '''Part Number'''.  
 
*<span style="color:#FF0000;">'''*'''</span>Enter a '''Part Number'''.  
*'''Upload&nbsp;'''a&nbsp;'''Part Image'''&nbsp;Part Images allow employees to quickly identify parts for part replacment and quick identification at the warehouse level. The&nbsp;'''Enlarge&nbsp;'''feature allows users to expand the image for better viewing.  
+
*'''Upload&nbsp;'''a&nbsp;'''Part Image'''&nbsp;Part Images allow employees to quickly identify parts for part replacment and quick identification at the warehouse level.  
 
*<span style="color:#FF0000;">'''*'''</span>Enter a '''Part Name'''.  
 
*<span style="color:#FF0000;">'''*'''</span>Enter a '''Part Name'''.  
*<span style="color:#FF0000;">'''*'''</span>Enter a '''Manufacturer'''. '''<u>NOTE</u>''': This field lists all available companies in a drop-down menu format. To add, edit, or delete a company from this list, return to the&nbsp;'''Spare Parts''' main screen and select the '''[[#Company_Submodule|Company Submodule]]''' submodule ('''Shop Floor > Configuration >CMMS - Admin&nbsp;>&nbsp;Company''').  
+
*<span style="color:#FF0000;">'''*'''</span>Enter a '''Manufacturer'''. '''<u>Note</u>''': This field lists all available companies in a drop-down menu format. To add, edit, or delete a company from this list, return to the&nbsp;'''Spare Parts''' main screen and select the '''[[#Company_Submodule|Company Submodule]]''' submodule ('''Shop Floor > Configuration >CMMS - Admin&nbsp;>&nbsp;Company''').  
 
*Enter '''Model''': The unique name or number for the specific part, provided by the manufacturer.  
 
*Enter '''Model''': The unique name or number for the specific part, provided by the manufacturer.  
 
*Enter '''Unit Weight''': A numeric value that corresponds with Unit weight UOM. Drop-down menu provided.  
 
*Enter '''Unit Weight''': A numeric value that corresponds with Unit weight UOM. Drop-down menu provided.  
Line 147: Line 110:
 
*Enter the '''Default Locator''': This field allows users to identify one Locator as the primary physical location for the PN.  
 
*Enter the '''Default Locator''': This field allows users to identify one Locator as the primary physical location for the PN.  
 
*<span style="color:#FF0000;">'''*'''</span>Enter '''Min Inventory'''. This field denotes the minimum inventory.  
 
*<span style="color:#FF0000;">'''*'''</span>Enter '''Min Inventory'''. This field denotes the minimum inventory.  
*<span style="color:#FF0000;">'''*'''</span>Enter '''Safety Stock:'''&nbsp;Safe inventory (safety stock) must be less than the value entered in minimum inventory (see '''Error Message: Safety Stock, below''').  
+
*<span style="color:#FF0000;">'''*'''</span>Enter '''Safety Stock:'''&nbsp;Safe inventory (safety stock) must be less than the value entered in minimum inventory .
 +
*Enter '''QTY UOM '''from the drop-down list. This field denotes the unit of measure for the part, according to how the part is packaged and counted. Options configured for this instance include: '''Undefined'''; '''EA'''; '''Meter'''; '''PKT'''; '''ST'''; '''PAK.&nbsp;'''
  
&nbsp;
+
'''<u>Note</u>''': Plants define'''QTY UOM''' (Quantity Unit of Measure) based on their unique parts inventory. The following figure shows possible '''QTY UOM''' (Quantity Unit of Measure) examples.
  
'''Figure 7: Error Message Safety Stock'''
+
*Enter '''Part Type''' from the drop-down list. Select whether the part is "'''Easy-expendable'''" or "'''None-easy-expendable'''." Default is Easy-expendable. See '''[[#Glossary_of_Terms|Glossary of Terms]]''' for further explanation of&nbsp;these&nbsp;terms.
 +
*Select '''Source Type''' from the drop-down list.&nbsp;Options include: '''Internal '''or '''External'''. Default value is External.
 +
*Check whether part number is&nbsp;'''In&nbsp;Stock'''
 +
*Check if '''Reused/Refurbished.'''
 +
*Check if '''Active.'''
 +
*Enter a '''Description.&nbsp;'''  
  
'''[[File:Safety Stock.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]'''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Bulk_Upload_Parts">Bulk Upload Parts</span> ==
  
&nbsp;
+
With the Bulk Upload spare parts function, users can import(create/add) many parts at one time. This function involves downloading the template file, uploading the file and validating whether the data is valid. Users can download the invalid records to check and correct.
  
*Enter '''QTY UOM '''from the drop-down list. This field denotes the unit of measure for the part, according to how the part is packaged and counted. Options configured for this instance include: '''Undefined'''; '''EA'''; '''Meter'''; '''PKT'''; '''ST'''; '''PAK.&nbsp;<u>NOTE</u>''': Plants define'''QTY UOM''' (Quantity Unit of Measure) based on their unique parts inventory. The following figure shows possible '''QTY UOM''' (Quantity Unit of Measure) examples.  
+
#Select the BULK UPLOAD , the Bulk Upload window pop-up.  
  
<br/> '''Figure 8: QTY UOM Drop-down Menu'''
+
<br/> '''Figure 4: Bulk Upload Spare Parts'''
  
[[File:Qty UOM Drop Down.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]
+
[[File:Figure 4- Bulk Upload Spare Parts.png|border]]
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
 
+
<ol start="2">
*Enter '''Part Type''' from the drop-down list. Select whether the part is "'''Easy-expendable'''" or "'''None-easy-expendable'''." Default is Easy-expendable. See '''[[#Glossary_of_Terms|Glossary of Terms]]''' for further explanation of&nbsp;these&nbsp;terms.  
+
<li>Select the here(blue link) to download the .csv template file and fill your parts list records if you do not have the template file.</li>
*Select '''Source Type''' from the drop-down list.&nbsp;Options include: '''Internal '''or '''External'''. Default value is External.  
+
<li>Drag and drop or select browse(blue link) to open your file.</li>
*Check whether part number is&nbsp;'''In&nbsp;Stock'''  
+
<li>Select '''VALIDATE RECORDS''', the UPLOAD button will show if the validation process passed.</li>
*Check if '''Reused/Refurbished.'''
+
<li>Select Upload to save the spare parts records to the CMMS system.</li>
*Check if '''Active.'''
+
<li>Select Download invalid records to download and check the invalid records if some records are invalid.</li>
*Enter a '''Description.&nbsp;'''
+
</ol>
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
===== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab">Add Part List: Alternative Parts Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span></span> =====
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Alternative_Parts_Tab">Add Part List: Alternative Parts Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
  
 
Under the '''Alternative Parts''' tab, users can '''add''' or '''delete''' alternative parts. The main purpose of this feature is to associate parts with alternative part choices.&nbsp;'''<u>NOTE</u>''': These actions refer to the selection of fungible parts.
 
Under the '''Alternative Parts''' tab, users can '''add''' or '''delete''' alternative parts. The main purpose of this feature is to associate parts with alternative part choices.&nbsp;'''<u>NOTE</u>''': These actions refer to the selection of fungible parts.
  
====== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts">Add Alternative Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ======
+
====== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Alternative_Parts">Add Alternative Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ======
  
 
#Select '''Add''' from the Alternative Parts menu. The '''Add Alternative Part''' pop-up window appears ('''see Figure, below''').  
 
#Select '''Add''' from the Alternative Parts menu. The '''Add Alternative Part''' pop-up window appears ('''see Figure, below''').  
Line 184: Line 153:
 
#Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.  
 
#Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.  
  
'''Figure 9: Add a New Alternative Part'''
+
'''Figure 5: Add a New Alternative Part'''
 
 
[[File:Figure 9- Add a New Alternative Part.png|RTENOTITLE]]
 
  
&nbsp;
+
[[File:Figure 5- Add a New Alternative Part.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
====== <span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts">Delete Alternative Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ======
+
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_Alternative_Parts">Delete Alternative Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ====
  
 
#<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9b6b-c966-54ba-8c5af535d4a2">Select an alternative part from the list.</span>  
 
#<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9b6b-c966-54ba-8c5af535d4a2">Select an alternative part from the list.</span>  
 
#<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9b6b-c966-54ba-8c5af535d4a2">Select</span> '''delete''' from the Alternative Part menu. This removes the selected alternative part from the list.  
 
#<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9b6b-c966-54ba-8c5af535d4a2">Select</span> '''delete''' from the Alternative Part menu. This removes the selected alternative part from the list.  
  
'''Figure 10: Delete Alternative Parts'''
+
&nbsp;
  
[[File:Delete Alternative Part.png|RTENOTITLE]]
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29">Add Part List: AVL (Approved Vendor List)</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
 
 
===== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29">Add Part List: AVL (Approved Vendor List)</span></span></span></span></span></span></span> =====
 
  
 
Under the '''AVL (Approved Vendor List) tab''', users may '''add''', '''edit,''' or '''delete''' approved vendor information.
 
Under the '''AVL (Approved Vendor List) tab''', users may '''add''', '''edit,''' or '''delete''' approved vendor information.
  
'''Figure 11: AVL (Approved Vendor List) Tab Functions'''
+
'''Figure 6: AVL (Approved Vendor List) Tab Functions'''
  
[[File:AVL Tab functions.png|RTENOTITLE]]
+
[[File:Figure 6 avl tab.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]
  
====== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29">Add an AVL (Approved Vendor List)</span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ======
+
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29">Add an AVL (Approved Vendor List)</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ====
  
1. Select '''Add''' from the menu. The '''Add''' pop-up window displays ('''see Figure 12, below''').<br/> 2. Complete the fields provided:
+
1. Select '''Add''' from the menu. The '''Add''' pop-up window displays.<br/> 2. Complete the fields provided:
  
 
*Select a '''Company''' from the drop-down list.  
 
*Select a '''Company''' from the drop-down list.  
 
*Enter an '''AVL PN (Approved Vendor List Part Number)'''.  
 
*Enter an '''AVL PN (Approved Vendor List Part Number)'''.  
*Enter a '''Lead Time. NOTE: Lead Time''' refers to the delivery time (in days) of the given part.  
+
*Enter a '''Lead Time. <u>Note</u>: Lead Time''' refers to the delivery time (in days) of the given part.  
 
*Select '''Currency''' from the drop-down list (according to country)  
 
*Select '''Currency''' from the drop-down list (according to country)  
 
*Enter '''Currency Price'''.  
 
*Enter '''Currency Price'''.  
Line 224: Line 189:
 
3. Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.
 
3. Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.
  
'''Figure 12: Add an AVL (Approved Vendor List)'''
+
'''Figure 7: Add an AVL (Approved Vendor List)'''
  
'''[[File:ADD an AVL.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
+
'''[[File:Figure 7- Add an AVL.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]'''
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
====== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29">Edit an AVL (approved Vendor List)</span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ======
+
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28approved_Vendor_List.29">Edit an AVL (approved Vendor List)</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ====
  
 
<br/> 1. To '''edit''' an AVL (Approved Vendor List), select an AVL from the list and choose '''Edit'''. The Edit pop-up menu appears.<br/> 2. The user may edit any of the fields provided:
 
<br/> 1. To '''edit''' an AVL (Approved Vendor List), select an AVL from the list and choose '''Edit'''. The Edit pop-up menu appears.<br/> 2. The user may edit any of the fields provided:
Line 245: Line 210:
 
3. Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.
 
3. Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.
  
&nbsp;
+
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29">Delete an AVL (Approved Vendor List)</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ====
 
 
====== <span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29">Delete an AVL (Approved Vendor List)</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ======
 
  
 
1. To '''delete''' an AVL, select an AVL from the list and choose '''Delete'''. This removes the AVL from the list.
 
1. To '''delete''' an AVL, select an AVL from the list and choose '''Delete'''. This removes the AVL from the list.
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
 
'''Figure 13: Delete an AVL (Approved Vendor List)'''<br/> [[File:Delete an AVL.png|RTENOTITLE]]
 
 
&nbsp;
 
 
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab">Add Part List: Subinventory & Locator Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
 
 
&nbsp;
 
 
'''Figure 14: Subinventory & Locator Tab'''
 
 
'''[[File:Figure 14- SubInventory Locator Tab1.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
 
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
Within the Subinventory & Locator Tab, users can specify the exact location of the Spare Part being catalogued into the system. There are three functions available in the '''Subinventory & Locator Tab''':
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_List:_Subinventory_.26_Locator_Tab">Add Part List: Subinventory & Locator Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
 
 
&nbsp;
 
  
&nbsp;
+
Within the Subinventory & Locator Tab, users can specify the exact location of the Spare Part being catalogued into the system. There are three functions available in the '''Subinventory & Locator Tab'''
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
 
+
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator">Add Sub Inventory & Locator</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ====
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator">Add Sub Inventory & Locator</span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
 
 
 
&nbsp;
 
  
 
#Search by Sub Inventory or utilize the drop-down feature  
 
#Search by Sub Inventory or utilize the drop-down feature  
Line 286: Line 232:
 
#Select Save.  
 
#Select Save.  
 
#Each Sub Inventory & Locator pair must be added and saved one at a time.  
 
#Each Sub Inventory & Locator pair must be added and saved one at a time.  
#Please '''<u>Note</u>''' that locations must be selected as pairs. Users cannot select a Locator individually; nor can they select a Sub Inventory individually.  
+
#Please Note that locations must be selected as pairs. Users cannot select a Locator individually; nor can they select a Sub Inventory individually.  
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
'''Figure 14: Add New Sub Inventory & Locator'''
+
'''Figure 8: Subinventory & Locator Tab'''
  
[[File:Figure 14- Add New Sub Inventory Locator.png|border]]
+
'''[[File:Figure 8- Add New Sub Inventory Locator.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]'''
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
Line 298: Line 244:
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory">Add Sub Inventory</span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
+
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Sub_Inventory">Add Sub Inventory</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ====
  
 
To add an individual Sub Inventory without a Locator:
 
To add an individual Sub Inventory without a Locator:
 
&nbsp;
 
  
 
#Select '''Add Sub Inventory'''.  
 
#Select '''Add Sub Inventory'''.  
Line 308: Line 252:
 
#'''Save'''.  
 
#'''Save'''.  
  
&nbsp;
+
'''Figure 9: Add New Sub Inventory'''
 
 
'''Figure 14b: Add New Sub Inventory'''
 
  
 
[[File:Figure 14b- Add New Sub Inventory.png|RTENOTITLE]]
 
[[File:Figure 14b- Add New Sub Inventory.png|RTENOTITLE]]
Line 316: Line 258:
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
 
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List:_Add_Part_Category_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List:_Add_Part_Category_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List:_Add_Part_Category_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List:_Add_Part_Category_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List:_Add_Part_Category_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List:_Add_Part_Category_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List:_Add_Part_Category_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List:_Add_Part_Category_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List:_Add_Part_Category_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List:_Add_Part_Category_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List:_Add_Part_Category_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List:_Add_Part_Category_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List:_Add_Part_Category_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List:_Add_Part_Category_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List:_Add_Part_Category_Tab">Part List: Add Part Category Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
&nbsp;
 
 
 
&nbsp;
 
 
 
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List:_Add_Part_Category_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List:_Add_Part_Category_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List:_Add_Part_Category_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List:_Add_Part_Category_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List:_Add_Part_Category_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_List:_Add_Part_Category_Tab">Part List: Add Part Category Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
 
  
 
Users can add the PN to one or multiple Part Categories. This option allows plants to efficiently apply changes to &nbsp;multiple parts in the same category based on the asset the spare part belongs to.
 
Users can add the PN to one or multiple Part Categories. This option allows plants to efficiently apply changes to &nbsp;multiple parts in the same category based on the asset the spare part belongs to.
  
&nbsp;
+
'''Figure 10: Add Part Category Tab'''
 
 
'''Figure 15a: Add Part Category Tab'''
 
 
 
'''[[File:Add Part Category Tab.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]'''
 
 
 
&nbsp;
 
  
&nbsp;
+
[[File:Figure 10- Add Part Category Tab.png|border|Figure 10- Add Part Category Tab.png]]
  
 
There are 2 functions available in the Add Part Category Tab:
 
There are 2 functions available in the Add Part Category Tab:
Line 339: Line 270:
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part_Category">Add a Part Category</span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
+
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Part_Category">Add a Part Category</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ====
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
Line 347: Line 278:
 
#Select '''Save'''.  
 
#Select '''Save'''.  
  
<br/> &nbsp;
+
'''Figure 11: Add Part Categories to PN'''
  
'''Figure 15b: Add Part Categories to PN'''
+
[[File:Figure 11- Add Part Categories to PN.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]
  
[[File:Add Part Categories.png|RTENOTITLE]]
+
&nbsp;
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category">Delete a Part Category</span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
+
&nbsp;
  
&nbsp;
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category">Delete a Part Category</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
  
 
#Check the '''Part Category''' to be removed from the PN.  
 
#Check the '''Part Category''' to be removed from the PN.  
Line 364: Line 295:
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
F'''igure 15c: Delete Part Category'''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Part_List">Edit Part List</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
 
 
[[File:Delete Part Category.png|RTENOTITLE]]
 
 
 
&nbsp;
 
 
 
&nbsp;
 
 
 
&nbsp;
 
 
 
&nbsp;
 
 
 
&nbsp;
 
 
 
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Part_List">Edit Part List</span></span></span></span></span></span> ====
 
  
 
Users can modify&nbsp;any of the part properties from the&nbsp;'''Part List''' sub-module page. To '''edit''' a part:
 
Users can modify&nbsp;any of the part properties from the&nbsp;'''Part List''' sub-module page. To '''edit''' a part:
  
 
#Select a part from the list. The '''Edit''' function becomes available.  
 
#Select a part from the list. The '''Edit''' function becomes available.  
#Select '''Edit'''. The'''''<i>Part Properties'''pop-up window appears which is comprised of five tabs: '''General''', '''Alternative Parts''', '''AVL'''; '''Sub Inventory & Locator'''; and '''Asset&nbsp;'</i>'''Type''', and&nbsp;'''Part Categories'''.  
+
#Select '''Edit'''. The '''Edit'''&nbsp;'''Part&nbsp;'''pop-up window appears.  
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
'''Figure 15: Edit a Part: General Tab'''
+
'''Figure 6: Edit a Part'''
  
&nbsp;
+
[[File:Figure 6- Edit a Part .png|border|700px|Edit a Part General Tab.png]]
 +
<ol start="3">
 +
<li>Users may edit the fields for the selected part.</li>
 +
</ol>
  
[[File:Edit a Part General Tab.png|1000px|Edit a Part General Tab.png]]
+
<u>'''Note'''</u>: The fields mirror those populated in the '''Add Part List'''
  
&nbsp;
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Alternative_Parts_Tab">Part Properties: Alternative Parts&nbsp;</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
===== <span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_General_Tab">Part Properties: General Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span> =====
+
Under the '''Alternative Parts''' page, users can '''add''' and '''delete''' alternative parts assigned to a given part.
  
Under the '''General''' tab, users may edit the following fields for the selected part:
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Alternative_Part">Add an Alternative Part</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
 
 
*'''Part Number'''
 
*'''Part Image'''
 
*'''Part Name'''
 
*'''Manufacturer'''
 
*'''Model'''
 
*'''Unit Weight'''
 
*'''Unit Weight UOM'''
 
*'''Project'''
 
*'''MFG PN'''
 
*'''Default Sub Inventory'''
 
*'''Max Inv'''
 
*'''Default Locator'''
 
*'''Min Inv'''
 
*'''Safety Stock'''
 
*'''Qty UOM'''
 
*'''Part Type'''
 
*'''Source Type'''
 
*'''In&nbsp;Stock'''
 
*'''Reused'''
 
*'''Active'''
 
*'''Description'''
 
 
 
'''NOTE''': The fields mirror those populated in the '''[[#Add_PartList:_General_Tab|Add Part List: General Tab]]'''. Refer above for detailed explanation of the fields. Or reference the '''[[#Glossary_of_Terms|Glossary of Terms]]'''
 
 
 
===== <span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Alternative_Parts_Tab">Part Properties: Alternative Parts Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span> =====
 
 
 
Under the '''Alternative Parts''' tab, users can '''add''' and '''delete''' alternative parts assigned to a given part.
 
 
 
====== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Alternative_Part">Add an Alternative Part</span></span></span></span></span></span> ======
 
  
 
1. Select '''Add''' from the Alternative Parts menu.<br/> 2. Type the Part number in the text provided and select the search icon (e.g. magnifying glass); or scroll the list to select the alternative part number.<br/> 3. Select the '''Add icon''' to complete.
 
1. Select '''Add''' from the Alternative Parts menu.<br/> 2. Type the Part number in the text provided and select the search icon (e.g. magnifying glass); or scroll the list to select the alternative part number.<br/> 3. Select the '''Add icon''' to complete.
  
&nbsp;
+
4.&nbsp;At the '''Add Alternative Part''' page, select one or more Part numbers from the list, then Select '''SAVE'''.
  
====== <span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Alternative_Part">Delete an Alternative Part</span></span></span></span></span></span> ======
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Alternative_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Alternative_Part">Delete an Alternative Part</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
  
 
1. Select a part from the '''Alternative Parts''' list. The '''Delete''' function becomes available.<br/> 2. Select '''Delete''' to remove the part from the list.
 
1. Select a part from the '''Alternative Parts''' list. The '''Delete''' function becomes available.<br/> 2. Select '''Delete''' to remove the part from the list.
  
<br/> '''Figure 16: Alternative Parts Tab'''
+
<br/> '''Figure 7: Alternative Parts'''
 
 
'''[[File:Figure 16- Alternative Parts Tab.png|border|800px|Figure 16- Alternative Parts Tab.png]]'''
 
 
 
&nbsp;
 
 
 
===== <br/> <br/> <span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29_Tab">Part Properties: AVL (Approved Vendor List) Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span> =====
 
  
Within the '''AVL''' tab, users can '''add''', '''edit''', and '''approve''' available part numbers (AVLs) for the selected part.
+
'''[[File:Figure 7- Alternative Parts.png|border|800px|Figure 16- Alternative Parts Tab.png]]'''
  
'''Figure 17: AVL Tab'''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="_Part_Properties:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="_Part_Properties:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="_Part_Properties:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="_Part_Properties:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="_Part_Properties:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29_Tab">&nbsp;<br/> <br/> <span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29_Tab">Part Properties: AVL (Approved Vendor List)&nbsp;</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
[[File:Figure 17- AVL Tab.png|border|800px|Figure 17- AVL Tab.png]]
+
Within the '''AVL''' page, users can '''add''', '''edit''', and '''approve''' available part numbers (AVLs) for the selected part.
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
====== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:">Add an AVL (Approved Vendor List):</span></span></span></span></span></span> ======
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:">Add an AVL (Approved Vendor List):</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
 
 
1. Select '''Add''' from the AVL menu. The '''Add''' pop-up window appears ('''see Figure 18''').
 
  
'''Figure 18: Add AVL (Approved Vendor List) Tab'''
+
1. Select '''Add''' from the AVL menu. The '''Add''' pop-up window appears. &nbsp;
 
 
[[File:Figure 18- Add AVL (Approved Vendor List) Tab.png|800px|Figure 18- Add AVL (Approved Vendor List) Tab.png]]
 
 
 
&nbsp;
 
  
 
2. Complete the information for the fields provided:
 
2. Complete the information for the fields provided:
Line 474: Line 352:
 
*Select '''Save''' to finish; or '''Cancel''' to abort.  
 
*Select '''Save''' to finish; or '''Cancel''' to abort.  
  
<u>'''NOTE'''</u>: The fields will mirror those populated in the '''[[#Add_Parts:_AVL_Tab|Add Parts: AVL Tab]]'''
+
'''Figure 8: Add an AVL(Approved Vendor List)'''
  
====== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:">Edit an AVL (Approved Vendor List):</span></span></span></span></span></span> ======
+
'''[[File:Figure 8- Add an AVL.png|border]]'''
  
#Select an AVL from the list. The Edit function activates ('''see Figure 17''').  
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:">Edit an AVL (Approved Vendor List):</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
 +
 
 +
#Select an AVL from the list. The Edit function activates.  
 
#Select '''Edit'''. The Edit pop-up window displays.  
 
#Select '''Edit'''. The Edit pop-up window displays.  
 
#'''Edit''' any of the provided fields as needed.  
 
#'''Edit''' any of the provided fields as needed.  
 
#Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel '''to abort.  
 
#Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel '''to abort.  
  
====== <span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:">Approve an AVL (Approved Vendor List):</span></span></span></span></span></span> ======
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:">Approve an AVL (Approved Vendor List):</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
  
#Select an '''AVL''' from the list. The Approve function activates, as noted by a blue checkmark ('''see Figure 17''').  
+
#Select an '''AVL''' from the list. The Approve function activates, as noted by a blue checkmark.  
 
#Select '''Approve''' to approve the '''AVL''' for the selected part.  
 
#Select '''Approve''' to approve the '''AVL''' for the selected part.  
#<u>'''NOTE'''</u>: If the AVL was already approved, this action will render the AVL as unapproved. Approved AVLs are denoted with a blue checkmark under the AVL list; unapproved AVLs are denoted with a grey checkmark.  
+
#<u>'''Note'''</u>: If the AVL was already approved, this action will render the AVL as unapproved. Approved AVLs are denoted with a blue checkmark under the AVL list; unapproved AVLs are denoted with a grey checkmark.  
 +
 
 +
'''&nbsp;Figure 9: Approve AVL'''
 +
 
 +
'''[[File:Figure 9- Approve AVL.png|border|700px|Figure 14- Approve AVL.png]]'''
  
&nbsp;
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:"><span class="mw-headline" id="Approve_an_AVL_.28Approved_Vendor_List.29:">Reject an AVL (Approved Vendor List):</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
  
===== <span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator_Tab">Part Properties: Sub Inventory & Locator Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span> =====
+
#Select an '''AVL''' from the list. The Approve function activates, as noted by a blue checkmark.  
 +
#Select '''Reject''' to approve the '''AVL''' for the selected part.  
  
A '''sub inventory''' is a location where parts are stored (e.g., a warehouse). '''Locators''' are the shelf ID within a sub inventory. Plants may opt to omit the locator in the description. Plants often make this choice in situations where there are so many of a given part that plant operators do not need a shelf ID to locate the part. In such cases, only the sub inventory field is selected.<br/> Within this tab, users can '''add''', '''enable''', or '''disable''' a sub inventory and/or locator.<br/> &nbsp;
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator_Tab">Part Properties: Sub Inventory & Locator</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
'''Figure 19: Sub Inventory & Locator Tab'''
+
A '''sub inventory''' is a location where parts are stored (e.g., a warehouse). '''Locators''' are the shelf ID within a sub inventory. Plants may opt to omit the locator in the description. Plants often make this choice in situations where there are so many of a given part that plant operators do not need a shelf ID to locate the part. In such cases, only the sub inventory field is selected.<br/> Within this tab, users can '''add'''&nbsp;a sub inventory and/or locator.<br/> &nbsp;
  
[[File:Figure 19- Sub Inventory & Locator Tab.png|800px|Figure 19- Sub Inventory & Locator Tab.png]]
+
'''Figure 10: Sub Inventory & Locator Tab'''
  
&nbsp;
+
[[File:Figure 10- Sub Inventory & Locator.png|border|800px|Figure 19- Sub Inventory & Locator Tab.png]]
  
&nbsp;
+
&nbsp; &nbsp;
  
====== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator">Add a Sub Inventory and Locator&nbsp;</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ======
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory_and_Locator">Add a Sub Inventory and Locator&nbsp;</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
  
 
#Select '''Add Sub Inventory & Locator''' from the menu. This opens the '''Add New Sub Inventory & Locator''' pop-up window.  
 
#Select '''Add Sub Inventory & Locator''' from the menu. This opens the '''Add New Sub Inventory & Locator''' pop-up window.  
Line 509: Line 394:
 
#Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.  
 
#Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.  
  
'''Figure 20: Add New Sub Inventory and Locator'''
+
'''Figure 11: Add New Sub Inventory and Locator'''
  
'''[[File:Figure 20- Add New SubInventory and Locator1.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
+
'''[[File:Figure 11- Add New SubInventory and Locator.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]'''
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
===== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory">Add a Sub Inventory</span></span></span></span></span></span> =====
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory">Add a Sub Inventory</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
  
 
Users may also add a sub inventory (without a locator). To add an individual sub inventory to the PN selected:
 
Users may also add a sub inventory (without a locator). To add an individual sub inventory to the PN selected:
Line 521: Line 406:
 
#Select '''Add a Sub Inventory'''.  
 
#Select '''Add a Sub Inventory'''.  
 
#Select the desired sub inventory from the drop-down list provided.  
 
#Select the desired sub inventory from the drop-down list provided.  
#The new sub inventory will populate on the screen and can be marked '''Active''' or '''Inactive.'''  
+
#The new sub inventory will populate on the screen'''.'''  
  
====== <span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Sub_Inventory_.26_Locator">Enable/Disable a Sub Inventory & Locator</span></span></span></span></span></span> ======
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Sub_Inventory">Delete a Sub Inventory</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
  
#Select an item from the '''Sub Inventory & Locator''' list. The Enable/Disable function activates.
+
Users may also delete a sub inventory (without a locator). To delete an individual sub inventory to the PN selected:
#Select '''Enable/Disable'''. This will enable (i.e., make active) any item that was previously disabled, and disable any item that was previously enabled. '''Enabled''' items are denoted by a '''blue checkmark''' while '''disabled''' items are denoted with a '''grey checkmark'''.  
 
  
&nbsp;
+
#Select the desired sub inventory from the drop-down list provided.
 +
#Select the Delete button from the toolbar provided'''.'''
  
===== <span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Asset_Type_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Asset_Type_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Asset_Type_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Asset_Type_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Asset_Type_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Asset_Type_Tab">Part Properties: Asset Type Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span> =====
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Asset_Type_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Asset_Type_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Asset_Type_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Asset_Type_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Asset_Type_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Asset_Type_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Asset_Type_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Asset_Type_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Asset_Type_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Asset_Type_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Asset_Type_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Asset_Type_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Asset_Type_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Asset_Type_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Asset_Type_Tab">Part Properties: Asset Type</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
Under the '''Asset Type Tab''', users can '''add''' and '''delete''' asset&nbsp;types assigned to a part number.
+
Under the '''Asset Type page''', users can '''add''' and '''delete''' asset&nbsp;types assigned to a part number.
  
====== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Asset_Type">Add an Asset Type</span></span></span></span></span></span> ======
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Asset_Type">Add an Asset Type</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
  
 
#Select '''Add''' from the menu tab.  
 
#Select '''Add''' from the menu tab.  
#Select the asset type from the list that populates in the pop-up window (see '''Figure 21, below)'''.  
+
#Select the asset type from the list that populates in the pop-up window.  
  
'''Figure 21: Add Asset Type'''
+
'''Figure 12: Add Asset Type'''
  
[[File:Figure 21- Add Asset Type.png|800px|Figure 21- Add Asset Type.png]]
+
[[File:Figure 12- Add Asset Type.png|border|800px|Figure 21- Add Asset Type.png]]
  
====== <span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Asset_Type">Delete an Asset Type&nbsp;</span></span></span></span></span></span> ======
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_an_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Asset_Type"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Asset_Type">Delete an Asset Type&nbsp;</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
  
 
#Select the asset type by activating the checkbox next to its name.  
 
#Select the asset type by activating the checkbox next to its name.  
 
#Select '''Delete'''.  
 
#Select '''Delete'''.  
#The asset type is now removed from the given part.  
+
#The asset type is now removed from the given part. &nbsp;  
 
 
'''Figure 22: Delete Asset Type'''<br/> [[File:Figure 22- Delete Asset Type.png|800px|Figure 22- Delete Asset Type.png]]
 
 
 
&nbsp;
 
  
===== <span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Part_Categories">Part Properties: Part Categories</span></span></span></span></span></span> =====
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Properties:_Part_Categories">Part Properties: Part Categories</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
 
Users can&nbsp;'''Add&nbsp;'''or&nbsp;'''Delete&nbsp;'''Part Categories from the Part Categories Tab while editing a specific Part.
 
Users can&nbsp;'''Add&nbsp;'''or&nbsp;'''Delete&nbsp;'''Part Categories from the Part Categories Tab while editing a specific Part.
Line 559: Line 440:
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
===== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_Categories">Add Part Categories</span></span></span></span></span></span> =====
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_Categories"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Part_Categories">Add Part Categories</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
  
 
#Select '''Add''' from the menu tab.  
 
#Select '''Add''' from the menu tab.  
#Select the part category from the list that populates in the pop-up window (see '''Figure 21a''', below).  
+
#Select the part category from the list that populates in the pop-up window. &nbsp;  
 
 
&nbsp;
 
 
 
'''Figure 21a: Add Part Category in Edit Part List'''
 
  
[[File:Add Part Category in Edit Part List.png|RTENOTITLE]]
+
'''Figure 13: Add Part Category in Edit Part List'''
 
 
&nbsp;
 
  
&nbsp;
+
[[File:Figure 13- Add Part Category in Edit Part List.png|border|800px|RTENOTITLE]]
  
===== <span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category_2">Delete a Part Category</span></span></span></span></span></span> =====
+
&nbsp; &nbsp;
  
&nbsp;
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Delete_a_Part_Category_2">Delete a Part Category</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>&nbsp;</span></span></span></span></span> ===
  
 
#Select the part category by activating the checkbox next to its name.  
 
#Select the part category by activating the checkbox next to its name.  
 
#Select '''Delete'''.  
 
#Select '''Delete'''.  
#The part category is now removed from the given part.  
+
#The part category is now removed from the given part.&nbsp;
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
'''Figure 22b: Delete Part Category in Edit Part List'''
+
''&nbsp;''
 
 
[[File:Delete Part Category in Edit Part List.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]
 
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
&nbsp;
+
= <span class="mw-headline" id="Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Receive_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Receive_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Receive_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Receive_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Receive_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Receive_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Receive_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Receive_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Receive_Parts_Submodule">Receive Parts[[File:Receive parts icon1.png|Receive parts icon.png]]&nbsp;</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> =
 
 
&nbsp;
 
 
 
&nbsp;
 
 
 
&nbsp;
 
 
 
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Part_List"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Part_List">Export Part List</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ====
 
 
 
To&nbsp;'''export '''the part list into an external file:
 
 
 
#Select '''Export''' from the Part List menu.
 
#The part list automatically downloads as a .csv file onto the local drive.
 
#Name, save, print, or share the .csv file as desired.
 
 
 
'''Figure 23: Export Part List'''
 
 
 
'''[[File:Figure 23- Export Part List1.png|border|700px|RTENOTITLE]]'''
 
 
 
&nbsp;
 
 
 
&nbsp;
 
 
 
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Receive_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Receive_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Receive_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Receive_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Receive_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Receive_Parts_Submodule">Receive Parts Submodule</span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
 
  
 
Within the '''Receive Parts''' submodule users receive deliveries and increase cycle counts.
 
Within the '''Receive Parts''' submodule users receive deliveries and increase cycle counts.
 
'''Figure 31: Receive Parts Icon'''<br/> [[File:Receive Parts Submodule Icon.png|RTENOTITLE]]
 
  
 
Within '''Receive Parts''', users can '''search/filter''' the part listing; '''add''' received parts; '''edit''' received parts, and&nbsp;'''export''' received part information.
 
Within '''Receive Parts''', users can '''search/filter''' the part listing; '''add''' received parts; '''edit''' received parts, and&nbsp;'''export''' received part information.
  
&nbsp;
+
'''Figure 14: Receive Parts Filtering Option'''
 
 
'''Figure 32: Receive Parts Filtering Option'''
 
 
 
[[File:Figure 32- Receive Parts Filtering Option.png|border|900px|Figure 32- Receive Parts Filtering Option.png]]
 
  
&nbsp;
+
[[File:Figure 14- Receive Parts Filtering Option.png|border|900px|Figure 32- Receive Parts Filtering Option.png]]
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts">Search/Filter Receive Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ====
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Receive_Parts">Search/Filter Receive Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
 
Users may search according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the '''Receive Parts''' Submodule:
 
Users may search according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the '''Receive Parts''' Submodule:
  
 
*'''Receive #''': This number is assigned to the part upon receipt in the warehouse. Enter the '''Receive#''' in the text box or scan the Receive# from the bar code.  
 
*'''Receive #''': This number is assigned to the part upon receipt in the warehouse. Enter the '''Receive#''' in the text box or scan the Receive# from the bar code.  
*'''Part Number''': Enter the '''Part Number''' in the text box. More '''Part Number''' search options are available by selecting the '''Part Number''' drop-down menu. (see '''Figure, below''')
+
*'''Part Number''': Enter the '''Part Number''' in the text box. More '''Part Number''' search options are available by selecting the '''Part Number''' drop-down menu.&nbsp;  
 
 
&nbsp;
 
 
 
'''Figure 33: Part Number Search Options: Drop-down Menu'''
 
 
 
'''[[File:Part Number Filter Drop-down menu.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]'''
 
 
 
 
*'''Received Date''': Enter the time span during which the part was received in the set of calendar drop-downs.  
 
*'''Received Date''': Enter the time span during which the part was received in the set of calendar drop-downs.  
 
*'''Received Date To''': Enter the end time span during which the part was received in the set of calendar drop-downs.&nbsp;  
 
*'''Received Date To''': Enter the end time span during which the part was received in the set of calendar drop-downs.&nbsp;  
 
'''Figure 34: Received Date: Calendar Drop-down'''
 
 
'''[[File:Received Date Drop down menu.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]'''
 
 
 
*'''Status''': Enter the part number status; users may choose from '''Pending''', '''Completed''', or '''Cancelled'''.  
 
*'''Status''': Enter the part number status; users may choose from '''Pending''', '''Completed''', or '''Cancelled'''.  
 
'''Figure 35: Status drop-down Menu'''
 
 
'''[[File:Status Dropdown Received.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]'''
 
 
 
*'''Subinventory''': Enter the sub inventory where the part number is located. Users may scroll through sub inventories using the drop-down menu provided.  
 
*'''Subinventory''': Enter the sub inventory where the part number is located. Users may scroll through sub inventories using the drop-down menu provided.  
 
'''Figure 36: Sub Inventory Drop-down Menu'''
 
 
'''[[File:Sub Inventory Drop Down menu.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]'''
 
 
 
*'''PO #:''' Enter the Purchase Order#  
 
*'''PO #:''' Enter the Purchase Order#  
 
*'''Created By: '''Users may search for received parts according to the employee who received them. Enter an employee ID.  
 
*'''Created By: '''Users may search for received parts according to the employee who received them. Enter an employee ID.  
Line 671: Line 492:
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts">Add Receive Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ====
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Receive_Parts">Add Receive Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
'''Figure 37: Add Receive Parts Pop-up Window'''
+
'''Figure 15: Add Receive Parts Pop-up Window'''
  
[[File:Figure 37- Add Receive Parts Pop up Window1.png|RTENOTITLE]]<br/> <br/> <br/> To '''add''' received parts''':'''<br/> '''''1. From the '''Receive Parts''' sub-module page, select '''Add'''. The '''Add Receive Parts''' pop-up menu displays (see '''Figure, above''').<br/> 2. Complete the fields provided:'''''<b>
+
[[File:Figure 15- Add Receive Parts Pop up Window.png|border|700px|RTENOTITLE]]<br/> <br/> <br/> To '''add received parts''':<br/> 1.From the'''Receive Parts'''&nbsp;sub-module page, select'''ADD EVEIVE PARTS'''. The'''&nbsp;'''Add Receive Parts&nbsp;pop-up menu displays'''.'''<br/> 2. Complete the fields provided:'
  
*''''''Part Number''': (Mandatory) A drop-down screen displays; users can search by: '''Part Number''', '''MFG Part Number''', or '''AVL MFG'''.'''
+
*'''Part Number''': (Mandatory) A drop-down screen displays; users can search by: '''Part Number''', '''MFG Part Number''', '''QOH''' or '''AVL MFG'''.  
*''''''Sub Inventory''': (Mandatory) Scroll bar allows users to search lists.'''
+
*'''Sub Inventory''': (Mandatory) Scroll bar allows users to search lists.  
*''''''Source Type''': (Mandatory) <u>'''Note'''</u>: Select '''Internal,'''&nbsp;'''External'''., or '''WR'''. Internal denotes inside the company; external denotes outside the company.'''
+
*'''Source Type''': (Mandatory) '''<u>Note</u>''': Select '''Internal,'''&nbsp;'''External'''., or '''WR'''. Internal denotes inside the company; external denotes outside the company.  
*''''''Locator''': (Mandatory) Users can scroll lists using the provided drop-down scroll bar.'''
+
*'''Locator''': (Mandatory) Users can scroll lists using the provided drop-down scroll bar.  
*''''''Customs''': When External is selected, the Customs field is available. Enter the Customs #.'''
+
*'''Customs''': When External is selected, the Customs field is available. Enter the Customs #.  
*''''''Customs Date''': Select the Customs Date with the drop-down calendar.'''
+
*'''Customs Date''': Select the Customs Date with the drop-down calendar.  
*''''''Currency''': Only required if the Source Type is External.'''
+
*'''Currency''': Only required if the Source Type is External.  
*''''''Vendor''': Enter specific vendor information into the text field or select the green All Vendors icon to scroll the complete vendor list.'''
+
*'''Vendor''': Enter specific vendor information into the text field or select the green All Vendors icon to scroll the complete vendor list.  
*''''''Unit Cost''': Only required if the Source Type is External.'''
+
*'''Unit Cost''': Only required if the Source Type is External.  
*''''''Issue #''': Denotes the recorded ID# when the goods are shipped from the warehouse (this list can be accessed in the Issue Parts submodule).'''
+
*'''Issue #''': Denotes the recorded ID# when the goods are shipped from the warehouse (this list can be accessed in the Issue Parts submodule).  
  
''''''<u>Note</u>''': If a PO# is selected, an Issue# is not needed.'''
+
'''<u>Note</u>: '''If a PO# is selected, an Issue# is not needed.
  
*''''''PO #''': denotes the Purchase Order number.'''
+
*'''PO #''': denotes the Purchase Order number.  
*''''''PR #''': denotes the Purchase Request number'''
+
*'''PR #''': denotes the Purchase Request number.
*''''''RTV #''': denotes the Return to Vendor number.'''
+
*'''RTV #''': denotes the Return to Vendor number.  
  
'''<u>'''Note'''</u>: Issue #, PO #, and RTV # cannot all be blank. At least one must be populated.'''
+
'''<u>Note</u>''': Issue #, PO #, and RTV # cannot all be blank. At least one must be populated.
  
*''''''Status''': Choose Pending or Completed.'''
+
*'''Status''':(Mandatory) Choose Pending or Completed.  
*''''''Qty UOM''': Enter the unit of measure for the quantity received.'''
+
*'''Qty UOM''': Enter the unit of measure for the quantity received.  
*''''''Received Qty''': Enter the quantity of PNs being received.'''
+
*'''Received Qty''': (Mandatory) Enter the quantity of PNs being received.  
*''''''Received Date:''' (Mandatory). The current date is populated by default.'''
+
*'''Received Date:''' (Mandatory). The current date is populated by default.  
*''''''Receiving User:&nbsp;'''The current user is populated by default.'''
+
*'''Receiving User:&nbsp;'''The current user is populated by default.  
*''''''Receiving Dept''': Select the department that received the PN from the drop-down menu.'''
+
*'''Receiving Dept''': Select the department that received the PN from the drop-down menu.  
*''''''Remark''': Add any additional comments.&nbsp;'''
+
*'''Remark''': Add any additional comments.  
  
'''3. Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.'''
+
'''3. '''Select&nbsp;'''Save'''&nbsp;to finish or''&nbsp;'''''Cancel'''&nbsp;to abort.
  
<br/> '''<u>'''Note'''</u>: Items in pending status do not have a Receive# assigned. If an item is in pending status, the Receive# field will remain blank.'''
+
<br/> '''<u>Note</u>''': Items in pending status do not have a Receive# assigned. If an item is in pending status, the Receive# field will remain blank.
  
'''<u>'''Note'''</u>: The cycle counts/QOH(Qty on Hand) will increase after the receive&nbsp;parts process.'''
+
The cycle counts/QOH(Qty on Hand) will increase after the receive&nbsp;parts process.
  
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts">Edit Receive Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts">Edit Receive Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
'''To '''edit''' received parts:'''
+
To edit&nbsp;received parts:
  
'''1. From the '''Receive Parts''' sub-module page, select an entry from the list. The '''Edit''' function displays.'''
+
1. From the Receive Parts sub-module page, select an entry from the list. The Edit function displays.
  
'''2. Select '''Edit'''. The '''Edit Receive Parts''' pop-up window appears, which is comprised of two tabs: '''General''', and '''Return Part'''.&nbsp;The Return part Edit field mirrors those used in Receive Parts and Trasaction Log submodules.'''
+
2. Select '''Edit'''. The Edit Receive Parts pop-up window appears.
  
===== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Tabs_in_Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Tabs_in_Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Tabs_in_Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Tabs_in_Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Tabs_in_Edit_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Tabs_in_Edit_Receive_Parts">Tabs in Edit Receive Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' =====
+
3. Update associated field then select Save or Cancel.
  
===== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts:_General_Tab">Edit Receive Parts: General Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>''' =====
+
'''Figure 16: Edit Receive Parts Pop-up Window'''
  
'''3. The General tab displays detailed information about the part selected. Users ''may not edit ''within the '''General Tab'''.&nbsp;'''
+
'''''[[File:Figure 16- Edit Receive Parts Pop-up Window.png|border|700px|Figure 38- Edit Receive Parts Pop-up Window.png]]'''''
  
''''''Figure 38: Edit Receive Parts Pop-up Window''''''
+
&nbsp;
  
'''[[File:Figure 38- Edit Receive Parts Pop-up Window1.png|Figure 38- Edit Receive Parts Pop-up Window.png]]'''
+
&nbsp;
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
&nbsp;
  
===== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts:_Return_Part_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts:_Return_Part_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts:_Return_Part_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts:_Return_Part_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts:_Return_Part_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts:_Return_Part_Tab">Edit Receive Parts: Return Part Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' =====
 
  
'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9b9b-25e8-ae73-b0d5429b1afb">This tab allows the user to complete a part return while working in the Receive Part submodule, thereby saving time. All actions in this tab will be reflected in the Return Parts submodule as well as the Transaction Log submodule. Users may add a part for return, edit the action, or export the details in .csv form onto their local drive.</span>'''
 
  
''''''<u><span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9b9b-25e8-ae73-b0d5429b1afb">Note</span></u>''': Only Receive Parts incomplete status can be returned (e.g. they are noted as received in the system). Upon entering this Return Part tab, the field will be empty, until a part is added for Return.'''
 
<div>'''&nbsp;'''</div> <div>''''''Figure 39: Edit Receive Parts: Return Part Tab''''''</div> <div>'''[[File:Figure 39- Edit Receive Parts- Return Part Tab.png|border|900px|Figure 39- Edit Receive Parts- Return Part Tab.png]]'''</div> <div>
 
#'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9b9d-83bb-2654-1424125ff5b7">To return a received part, select</span> Add'''
 
#'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9b9d-83bb-2654-1424125ff5b7">Complete the fields:</span>'''
 
  
*''''''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9b9d-e6cb-d4d7-08a8bc89da83">Returned Qty</span> '''(drop-down)'''
+
= <span class="mw-headline" id="Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Issue_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Issue_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Issue_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Issue_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Issue_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Issue_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Issue_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Issue_Parts_Submodule">Issue Parts &nbsp;[[File:Issue parts icon1.png|Issue parts icon.png]]</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> =
*''''''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9b9d-e6cb-d4d7-08a8bc89da83">Qty UOM</span>''' (automatically populates)'''
 
*'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9b9d-e6cb-d4d7-08a8bc89da83">'''Returned by''':</span> Enter your name in the field provided (mandatory)'''
 
*''''''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9b9d-e6cb-d4d7-08a8bc89da83">Returned date</span>''': Select the date for return with the drop-down calendar.'''
 
*'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9b9d-e6cb-d4d7-08a8bc89da83">'''Status''':</span> If today’s date is selected, choose '''Complete'''. If a future date is selected, the user will need to return to the portal at a later date to mark the action complete; the system will not send items to return automatically.'''
 
*''''''Remark''': Enter the remark/reason for these&nbsp;return parts.'''
 
<ol start="3">
 
<li>'''Click '''Save''' to submit the Return Parts or '''Cancel''' to cancel return parts.'''</li>
 
</ol>
 
  
'''<u>'''Note'''</u>: The cycle counts/QOH(Qty on Hand) will decrease after the return part process.'''
+
The&nbsp;Issue&nbsp;Parts submodule is used to dispatch parts in and out of the manufacturing system. Parts may be removed from the system due to poor quality (poor quality parts are scrapped or refurbished); or dispatched into production. Issue Parts&nbsp;and Cycle Counts&nbsp;are connected submodules; as parts are issued, inventory in the cycle count is reduced to reflect the transaction. From the Issue Parts&nbsp;sub-module page, users can search/filter&nbsp;the listing; or add, edit, or export&nbsp;issue parts data.
</div>
 
''''''Figure 40: Add Return Parts''''''
 
  
'''[[File:Add Return Parts1.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
+
&nbsp;
  
===== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Part"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Part">'''Edit''' Return Part</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' =====
 
  
#'''Select the '''Edit icon'''. Users may change:'''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts">Search/Filter Issue Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
*''''''Returned Date''''''
+
#Users may search according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the Issue PartsSubmodule:
*''''''Returned Qty''''''
 
*''''''Qty UOM''''''
 
*''''''Status''''''
 
*''''''Remark Fields''''''
 
  
''''''<u>Note</u>:'''&nbsp;<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9ba4-1457-e602-392d4f56ea64">Users cannot change the quantity within the edit feature. If the return quantity must be changed, change the status to canceled and return to the add button to create a new order.</span>'''
+
*'''Issue''' #: Issue numbers are generated automatically once the issues parts record moves to completed status.
 +
*'''Part Number''': Drop-down menu allows the user to search more selectively by '''Part Number''', '''Part Name''', '''MFG PN''', or '''AVL PN'''.  
 +
*'''Received Date From/Received Date To''': Use the provided calendars to enter the time span during which parts were issued.  
 +
*'''Status''': Drop-down menu includes: '''Pending/Completed/Cancelled'''.
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
'''<u><span id="docs-internal-guid-4e0e6b59-7bf5-0418-f505-078a67af1749">Note</span></u>''': By default, '''Pending&nbsp;'''status will be selected as a filtering option. To view '''Issue Parts&nbsp;'''records in '''Completed&nbsp;'''or '''Cancelled&nbsp;'''statuses, select the desired category from the top menu bar and select the search icon (e.g. magnifying glass).
  
''''''Figure 40a: Edit Return Parts''''''
+
*'''SubInventory''':  
 +
*'''Receiving Dept'''  
 +
<ol start="2">
 +
<li>&nbsp; &nbsp;Select filtering option(s).</li>
 +
<li>Choose the search icon(e.g. magnifying glass).</li>
 +
</ol>
  
'''[[File:Edit Return Parts5.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
+
&nbsp;
  
'''&nbsp;'''
 
  
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Receive_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Receive_Parts">Export Receive Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
 
  
'''To '''export''' information about a received/returned part onto a local hard drive:'''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts">Add Issue Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
#'''Choose the information desired by activating the checkbox next to its entry.'''  
+
'''To '''add an entry to the Issue Parts page:
#'''Select '''Export''' from the '''Receive Parts''' sub-module main page (see '''Figure 32''').'''
 
#'''A .csv file automatically downloads onto the user’s local drive.'''
 
#'''Open the file to name, save, or print as desired.'''
 
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
#Select '''ADD ISSUE PARTS''' from the menu. The Add Issue Partspop-up window appears.
 +
#Complete the fields provided: (Refer to the [[#Glossary_of_Terms|Glossary of ]]Terms for&nbsp;more information)
  
=== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Issue_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Issue_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Issue_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Issue_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Issue_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Issue_Parts_Submodule">Issue Parts Submodule</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ===
+
*'''Part Number''': (Mandatory) Drop-down menu provides a list of part numbers to further limit the search: '''Part Number''', '''Part Name''', '''MFG PN''', or '''AVL PN'''.
 +
*'''Sub Inventory''': (Mandatory) Scroll '''sub&nbsp;'''<span style="box-sizing: border-box; margin: 0px; padding: 0px;">'''inventory&nbsp;'''locations</span>&nbsp;with the drop-down menu provided.
 +
*'''Locator''': (Mandatory) Scroll locators (buildings) with the drop-down menu provided.
 +
*'''Location''': Drop-down menu provides a list of buildings and floors in a tree format.
 +
*'''Production Line''': Enter the number or name of the '''production&nbsp;'''<span style="box-sizing: border-box; margin: 0px; padding: 0px;">'''line&nbsp;'''the</span>&nbsp;machine associated with the issued '''PN'''operates
 +
*'''Asset''': Select the '''Asset'''(machine) to which the PN is associated.
 +
*'''Shift''': Enter the&nbsp;<span style="box-sizing: border-box; margin: 0px; padding: 0px;">'''shift&nbsp;'''during</span>&nbsp;which the part was issued, if applicable.
 +
*'''Confirmed By''': Name of the employee issuing the PN
 +
*'''Reason''': (Mandatory) Choose '''Poor&nbsp;'''<span style="box-sizing: border-box; margin: 0px; padding: 0px;">'''Quality&nbsp;'''or</span>&nbsp;'''Issued to Production'''.
 +
*'''WO#''': If the Part is being rebuilt, enter the '''Work&nbsp;'''<span style="box-sizing: border-box; margin: 0px; padding: 0px;">'''Order&nbsp;'''number</span>&nbsp;assigned to the task.
 +
*'''Status''':(Mandatory)Pending/Completed
 +
*'''Qty Uom''': '''PN'''’s quantity Unit of Measure
 +
*'''Issued Qty''': (Mandatory)
 +
*'''Receiver''': (Mandatory)
 +
*'''Received Date''': (Mandatory)Add the date the PN was received.
 +
*'''Vendor''': (Mandatory) Choose the '''Vendor'''from the drop-down menu. Only vendors associated with the given part are available for selection.
 +
*'''Currency''': The type of currency according to country. The&nbsp;<span style="box-sizing: border-box; margin: 0px; padding: 0px;">'''Currency&nbsp;'''field</span>&nbsp;automatically populates based on the part number selected.
 +
*'''Unit Cost''': The '''Unit&nbsp;'''<span style="box-sizing: border-box; margin: 0px; padding: 0px;">'''Cost&nbsp;'''field</span>&nbsp;populates based on the PN selected.
 +
*'''Source Type'''''<b>:</b>''(Mandatory)&nbsp;Select from the drop-down list. Options include: Internal or External.'''''&nbsp;'''''
 +
**'''External''': Refers to items manufactured by an outside vendor.
 +
**'''Internal''': Refers to items manufactured within the parent company. 
 +
*'''Source''': The company or department that supplies the part based on External or Internal selection. Utilize the drop-down menu to select the desired source.&nbsp;
 +
*'''Current User''': The current user is displayed by default. Alternatively, users may select another user from the drop-down menu.
 +
*'''Receiving Dept:''' The department where the part will be issued. Select the department from the drop-down list; the list is displayed in tree format.
 +
*'''Description''': Provide any extra information that might be helpful to plant personnel.
  
'''The '''Issue Parts''' submodule is used to dispatch parts in and out of the manufacturing system. Parts may be removed from the system due to poor quality (poor quality parts are scrapped or refurbished); or dispatched into production. '''Issue Parts''' and '''Cycle Counts''' are connected submodules; as parts are issued, inventory in the cycle count is reduced to reflect the transaction. From the '''Issue Parts''' sub-module page, users can '''search/filter''' the listing; or '''add''', '''edit''', or '''export''' issue parts data.'''
+
'''Figure 17: Add Issue Parts Pop-up Window'''
  
''''''Figure 41: Issue Parts Submodule Icon'''<br/> [[File:Issue Parts Submodule Icon.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
+
'''''[[File:Figure 17- Add Issue Parts Pop-up Window.png|border|800px|RTENOTITLE]]'''''
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
'''<u>Note</u>''': The cycle counts/QOH(Qty on Hand) will decrease after the issue parts process.
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
&nbsp;
  
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Issue_Parts">Search/Filter Issue Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts">Edit Issue Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
#'''Users may search according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the '''Issue Parts''' Submodule:'''
+
To edit issue parts:
  
*''''''Issue''' #: Issue numbers are generated automatically once the issues parts record moves to completed status.'''  
+
#From the Issue Parts page, select an entry from the list.  
*''''''Part Number''': Drop-down menu allows the user to search more selectively by '''Part Number''', '''Part Name''', '''MFG PN''', or '''AVL PN'''.'''
+
#Select '''Edit'''.&nbsp;
*''''''Received Date From/Received Date To''': Use the provided calendars to enter the time span during which parts were issued.'''
+
#The '''Edit Issue''' Parts pop-up window displays.  
*''''''Status''': Drop-down menu includes: '''Pending/Completed/Cancelled'''.'''
+
#Edit any of the fields provided as needed:
 +
#Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.  
  
''''''<u><span id="docs-internal-guid-4e0e6b59-7bf5-0418-f505-078a67af1749">Note</span></u>''': By default, '''Pending''' status will be selected as a filtering option. To view '''Issue Parts''' records in '''Completed''' or '''Cancelled''' statuses, select the desired category from the top menu bar and select the search icon (e.g. magnifying glass).'''
+
<u>'''Note'''</u>: By default, Pending status will be selected as a filtering option. To view Issue Parts records in Completed or Canceled statuses, select the desired category from the top menu bar and select the search icon (e.g. magnifying glass).
  
''''''Figure 42a: Status Filtering Selection''''''
+
'''Figure 26: Edit Issue Parts'''
  
'''[[File:Figure 42a- Status Filtering Selection.png|border|900px|Figure 42a- Status Filtering Selection.png]]'''
+
'''''[[File:Figure 18- Edit Issue Parts.png|border|800px|RTENOTITLE]]'''''
<div>'''&nbsp;'''</div>
 
*''''''Sub Inventory''': Location of the Part, within the broader location'''
 
*'''Receiving Dept: The department of&nbsp;the Parts received.'''  
 
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;2. Select filtering option(s).'''
+
<span class="mw-headline" id=""><span class="mw-headline" id="">&nbsp;</span></span>
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;3. Choose the '''search icon''' (e.g. magnifying glass).'''
 
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
= <span class="mw-headline" id="Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Return_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Return_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Return_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Return_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Return_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Return_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Return_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Return_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Return_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Return_Parts_Submodule">Return Parts&nbsp;[[File:Return parts icon1.png|Return parts icon.png]]</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> =
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
Return Parts&nbsp;submodule is used to record those parts sent back to the vendor. Changes in the Return Partssubmodule are reflected in the Cycle Countinventory. In the Return Partsmodule, users can search/filter, add, edit,or exportinformation about returned parts.
  
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Issue_Parts">Add Issue Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
+
&nbsp;
  
'''To '''add an entry to the Issue Parts page:''''''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Return_Parts">Search/Filter Return Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
#'''Select '''Add''' from the menu. The '''Add Issue Parts''' pop-up window appears.'''
+
&nbsp;1.Users may search according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the Return PartsSubmodule:
#'''Complete the fields provided: (Refer to the '''[[#Glossary_of_Terms|Glossary of Terms]]''' for more information)'''
 
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
*'''RTV# (Return to Vendor)'''
 +
*'''Receive#'''
 +
*'''Returned Date From'''
 +
*'''Returned Date To'''
 +
*'''Status'''  
  
*''''''Part Number''': (Mandatory) Drop-down menu provides a list of part numbers to further limit the search: '''Part Number''', '''Part Name''', '''MFG PN''', or '''AVL PN'''.'''
+
&nbsp;2.Select filtering options.
*''''''Sub Inventory''': (Mandatory) Scroll '''sub inventory''' locations with the drop-down menu provided.'''
 
*''''''Locator''': (Mandatory) Scroll locators (buildings) with the drop-down menu provided.'''
 
*''''''Location''': Drop-down menu provides a list of buildings and floors in a tree format.'''
 
*''''''Production Line''': Enter the number or name of the '''production line''' the machine associated with the issued '''PN''' operates'''
 
*''''''Asset''': Select the '''Asset''' (machine) to which the PN is associated.'''
 
*''''''Shift''': Enter the '''shift''' during which the part was issued, if applicable.'''
 
*''''''Confirmed By''': Name of the employee issuing the PN'''
 
*''''''Reason''': (Mandatory) Choose '''Poor Quality''' or '''Issued to Production'''.'''
 
*''''''WO#''': If the Part is being rebuilt, enter the '''Work Order''' number assigned to the task.'''
 
*''''''Status''': Pending/Completed'''
 
*''''''Qty Uom''': '''PN'''’s quantity Unit of Measure'''
 
*''''''Issued Qty''': (Mandatory)'''
 
*''''''Receiver''': (Mandatory)'''
 
*''''''Received Date''': Add the date the PN was received.'''
 
*''''''Vendor''': (Mandatory) Choose the '''Vendor''' from the drop-down menu. Only vendors associated with the given part are available for selection.'''
 
*''''''Currency''': The type of currency according to country. The '''Currency''' field automatically populates based on the part number selected.'''
 
*''''''Unit Cost''': The '''Unit Cost''' field populates based on the PN selected.'''
 
*''''''Source Type''': Select from the drop-down list. Options include: Internal or External. '''
 
**''''''External''': Refers to items manufactured by an outside vendor.'''
 
**''''''Internal''': Refers to items manufactured within the parent company.''' 
 
*''''''Source''': The company or department that supplies the part based on External or Internal selection. Utilize the drop-down menu to select the desired source.&nbsp;'''
 
*''''''Current User''': The current user is displayed by default. Alternately, users may select another user from the drop-down menu.'''
 
*''''''Receiving Dept:''' The department where the part will be issued. Select the department from the drop-down list; the list is displayed in tree format.'''
 
*''''''Description''': Provide any extra information that might be helpful to plant personnel.'''
 
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
3. Choose the search icon (e.g. magnifying glass).
  
''''''Figure 43: Add Issue Parts Pop-up Window''''''
+
'''Figure 19: Return Part Main Menu''&nbsp;'''''
  
'''[[File:Figure 43- Add Issue Parts Pop-up Window1.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
+
'''[[File:Figure 19- Return Part Main Menu.png|border|900px|Figure 46- Return Part Main Menu.png]]'''
  
'''<u>'''Note'''</u>: The cycle counts/QOH(Qty on Hand) will decrease after the issue parts process.'''
+
&nbsp;
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Return_Parts">Add Return Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Issue_Parts">Edit Issue Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
+
To&nbsp;Return&nbsp;a received part:
  
'''To '''edit''' issue parts:'''
+
#<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bb0-8258-48b1-7ff6b631d944">Select the&nbsp;</span>Receive Part from the list of entries by activating the checkmark.
  
#'''From the '''Issue Parts''' page, select an entry from the list.'''
+
'''<u><span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bb0-8258-48b1-7ff6b631d944">Note</span></u>''': Only parts in received status may be returned. If a complete list is not available, the status filter may have been applied. Users may need to refresh the screen to view parts in all status conditions.
#'''Select '''Edit'''.'''
+
<ol start="2">
#'''The '''Edit Issue Parts''' pop-up window displays.'''
+
<li><span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bb0-8258-48b1-7ff6b631d944">Select the&nbsp;</span>Add icon</li>
#'''Edit any of the fields provided as needed:'''
+
<li><span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bb0-8258-48b1-7ff6b631d944">A pop-up window displays (</span>Add Return Parts), allowing the user to select the received part(s).</li>
 +
<li>Complete all fields provided:</li>
 +
</ol>
  
*''''''Part Number''': Drop-down menu allows the user to search more selectively by '''Part Number''', '''Part Name''', '''MFG PN''', or '''AVL PN'''.'''  
+
*Receive#: (Mandatory)Number assigned to the part being returned: choose from the list available in the drop-down menu. '''<u>Note</u>''': Recieve numbers are generated automatically after&nbsp;the return parts record moves to completed status.
*''''''Sub Inventory''''''
+
*Returned Qty: # of parts being returned to vendor (Mandatory)
*''''''Locator''''''
+
*Qty Uom: The Qty Uomfield automatically populates based on the part number. Qty refers to the part’s unit of measure, or how the part is packaged. For example, EA (each) defines the part as a separate item. Qty Uom is plant-specific based on part size, shape, and packaging.&nbsp;
*''''''Location''''''
+
*Returned By: Identify the person completing the return (Mandatory)
*''''''Production Line''''''
+
*Returned Date: Choose the date the part is to be returned from the drop-down calendar (Mandatory)'  
*''''''Asset''''''
+
*Status: Enter the status of the return: (e.g. pending; or completed) (Mandatory)
*''''''Shift''''''
+
*Remark: Enter any additional information in the textbox provided (Optional)
*''''''Confirmed By''''''
 
*''''''Reason''': Choose '''Poor Quality/Issued to Production''''''
 
*''''''WO#''''''
 
*''''''Status''': Pending/Completed/Canceled'''
 
*''''''Qty Uom''''''
 
*''''''Issued Qty''''''
 
*''''''Receiver''''''
 
*''''''Received Date''''''  
 
*''''''Vendor''''''
 
*''''''Currency''''''
 
*''''''Unit Price''''''
 
*''''''Description''''''
 
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;5. Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.'''
+
&nbsp;6. Select Save to finish or Cancel to abort.
  
'''<u>'''Note'''</u>: By default, '''Pending''' status will be selected as a filtering option. To view Issue Parts records in '''Completed''' or '''Cancelled''' statuses, select the desired category from the top menu bar and select the search icon (e.g. magnifying glass).'''
+
'''<u>Note</u>''': If the system will not accept a return, it is possible the part has already been returned. Navigate&nbsp;to the Receive module&nbsp;to check the part's history.
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
'''Figure 28: Add Return Parts'''
  
''''''Figure 44: Edit Issue Parts''''''
+
'''[[File:Figure 20- Add Return Parts.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]'''
  
'''[[File:Figure 44- Edit Issue Parts1.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
+
&nbsp;
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts">Edit Return Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Issue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Issue_Parts">Export Issue Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
+
#After Return Parts are added, they can similarly be edited.
 +
#Select an entry from the Return Partslist.
 +
#Select '''Edit'''. The Edit Return Parts pop-up window displays.
 +
#Edit the fields provided
 +
#&nbsp; Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.
  
'''To '''export''' information onto a local device:'''
+
&nbsp;
  
#'''Activate the checkbox next to the line of information you’d like to export.'''
+
= <span class="mw-headline" id="Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Adjust_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Adjust_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Adjust_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Adjust_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Adjust_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Adjust_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Adjust_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Adjust_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Adjust_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Adjust_Parts_Submodule">Adjust Parts[[File:Adjust parts icon1.png|Adjust parts icon.png]]</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> =
#'''Select '''Export''' from the '''Issue Parts''' sub-module page (see '''Figure 42 for the Export menu page''').'''
 
#'''A .csv file automatically downloads onto the user’s local drive.'''
 
#'''The user may open and rename, save, or print as desired.'''
 
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
The Adjust Parts submodule is used to record any discrepancies in the actual number of parts recorded in the CMMS system.&nbsp;
  
=== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Return_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Return_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Return_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Return_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Return_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Return_Parts_Submodule">Return Parts Submodule</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ===
+
In the Adjust Parts submodule, users can search/filter, add, or edit data.
  
''''''Return Parts''' submodule is used to record those parts sent back to the vendor. Changes in the '''Return Parts''' submodule are reflected in the '''Cycle Count''' inventory. In the '''Return Parts''' module, users can '''search/filter''', '''add''', '''edit,''' or '''export''' information about returned parts.'''
+
'''Figure 21: Adjust Parts'''
  
''''''Figure 45: Return Parts Icon''''''
+
'''[[File:Figure 21- Adjust Parts.png|border|900px|Figure 50- Main Menu- Adjust Parts.png]]'''<br/> &nbsp;
  
'''[[File:Return Parts Submodule Icon.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline"><span class="mw-headline"><span class="mw-headline"><span class="mw-headline"><span class="mw-headline"><span class="mw-headline"><span class="mw-headline"><span class="mw-headline"><span class="mw-headline"><span class="mw-headline">Search/Filter Adjust Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Return_Parts">Search/Filter Return Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
+
#Users may search for Adjust Parts entries according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the Adjust Parts Submodule:
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;1. Users may search according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the '''Return Parts''' Submodule:'''
+
*'''Adjust#''' Search by the number assigned to the Adjust Parts entry. Note: This number is automatically assigned when the entry is created.
 +
*'''Part Number''': A drop-down menu is available.
 +
*'''SubInventory''': Select the sub inventory using the drop-down menu.
 +
*'''Update''' Date From/Update Date To: Select the time span the parts were adjusted by populating the drop-down calendars.
 +
*'''Status''': Search by the status of the adjusted Parts record: Pending, Rejected, or Cancelled.
 +
<ol start="2">
 +
<li>Select filtering option(s).</li>
 +
<li>Choose the search icon (e.g. magnifying glass).</li>
 +
</ol>
  
*''''''RTV# (Return to Vendor)''''''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts">Add Adjust Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
*''''''Receive#''''''
 
*''''''Returned Date From''''''
 
*''''''Returned Date To''''''
 
*''''''Status''''''
 
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;2. Select filtering options.'''
+
To add an entry to Adjust Parts:
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;3. Choose the '''search icon '''(e.g. magnifying glass).'''
+
#Select '''Add''' from the Adjust Parts menu.&nbsp;  
 +
#The '''Add Adjust Parts''' pop-up window displays.  
 +
#Complete the provided fields:
  
''''''Figure 46: Return Part Main Menu'''<br/> &nbsp;'''
+
&nbsp;
  
'''[[File:Figure 46- Return Part Main Menu.png|border|900px|Figure 46- Return Part Main Menu.png]]'''
+
*Part Number (Mandatory) Select the PN from the drop-down list
 +
*Sub Inventory (Mandatory) Select the Sub Inventory from the drop-down list
 +
*Locator (Mandatory)
 +
*Qty Uom (Optional)
 +
*System Qty: This field is automatically populated when the user selects the location(s)
 +
*Actual Qty: (Mandatory)
 +
*Approved By: (Mandatory)Select the administrator with approval permissions from the drop-down menu. Note: Approvers are added to the system within the CMMS Admin portal. (Shop Floor Control > Configuration > CMMS Admin > Group > Add User)
 +
*Status: (Mandatory)Select: Pending, Rejected, or Cancelled
 +
*Description (Optional)
 +
<ol start="4">
 +
<li>Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.</li>
 +
</ol>
  
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Return_Parts">Add Return Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
+
'''Figure 22: Add Adjust Parts'''
  
'''To&nbsp;'''Return&nbsp;'''a received part:'''
+
'''''[[File:Figure 22- Add Adjust Parts.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]'''''
  
#'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bb0-8258-48b1-7ff6b631d944">Select the </span>'''Receive Part''' from the list of entries by activating the checkmark.'''
+
&nbsp;
#''''''<u><span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bb0-8258-48b1-7ff6b631d944">NOTE</span></u>''': Only parts in received status may be returned. If a complete list is not available, the status filter may have been applied. Users may need to refresh the screen to view parts in all status conditions.'''
 
#'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bb0-8258-48b1-7ff6b631d944">Select the </span>'''Add icon''''''
 
#'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bb0-8258-48b1-7ff6b631d944">A pop-up window displays (</span>'''Add Return Parts'''), allowing the user to select the received part(s).'''
 
#'''Complete all fields provided:'''
 
  
*''''''Receive#''': Number assigned to the part being returned: choose from the list available in the drop-down menu. <u>'''NOTE'''</u>: Recieve numbers are generated automatically after&nbsp;the return parts record moves to completed status.'''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts">Edit Adjust Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
*''''''Returned Qty''': # of parts being returned to vendor (Mandatory)'''
 
*''''''Qty Uom''': The '''Qty Uom''' field automatically populates based on the part number. '''Qty Uom''' refers to the part’s unit of measure, or how the part is packaged. For example, EA (each) defines the part as a separate item. Qty Uom is plant specific based on part size, shape, and packaging.&nbsp;'''
 
*''''''Returned By''': Identify the person completing the return (Mandatory)'''
 
*''''''Returned Date''': Choose the date the part is to be returned from the drop-down calendar (Mandatory)'''
 
*''''''Status''': Enter the status of the return: (e.g. pending; or completed) (Mandatory)'''
 
*''''''Remark''': Enter any additional information in the textbox provided (Optional)'''
 
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;6. Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.'''
+
To&nbsp;editan Adjust Partsentry:
  
''''''<u>Note</u>''': If the system will not accept a return, it is possible the part has already been returned. Navigate&nbsp;to the Receive module&nbsp;to check the part's history.'''
+
#Select an entry from the Adjust Partspage. The Editfunction is now available.
 +
#Select Edit. The Edit Adjust Partspop-up window displays.  
 +
#Complete the provided fields.  
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
<u>Note</u>: Fields are the same as those configured in the Add Adjust Partsfunction:
  
''''''Figure 47: Add Return Parts''''''
+
&nbsp;4. Select '''Save''' to complete or '''Cancel''' to abort.
  
'''[[File:Figure 47- Add Return Parts .png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
+
'''<u>Note</u>''':&nbsp;1. The approver cannot be the person who requests this adjustment.
  
<br/> '''<u>'''Note'''</u>''':''' After the '''Receive#''' is selected, detailed information concerning the '''Part Number''' displays in grey above the working text box for easy reference (see&nbsp;'''Figure''', below).'''
+
&nbsp;2. Only the creator and approver can edit the requested adjustment.'
  
''''''Figure 47a: Add Return Part: Part Number Drop-down Menu'''<br/> [[File:Part Number Drop-down Menu.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]<br/> &nbsp;'''
+
&nbsp;
  
'''<u>'''Note'''</u>: The cycle counts/QOH(Qty on Hand) will decrease after the return parts process.'''
+
&nbsp;
  
'''&nbsp;'''
 
  
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Return_Parts">Edit Return Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
+
= <span class="mw-headline" id="Subinventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Subinventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Subinventory_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Subinventory_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Subinventory_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Subinventory_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Subinventory_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Subinventory_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Subinventory_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Subinventory_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Subinventory_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Subinventory_Submodule">Subinventory[[File:Subinventory.png|Subinventory icon.png]]</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> =
  
#'''After '''Return Parts''' are added, they can similarly be edited.'''
+
The Subinventorysubmodule of Spare Parts is useful for managing sites that house parts at multiple locations. In the Subinventorysubmodule, users can addand editsub inventory locations; and mark sub inventory locations as Active/Inactive.
#'''Select an entry from the '''Return Parts''' list.'''
 
#'''Select '''Edit'''. The '''Edit Return Parts''' pop-up window displays.'''
 
#'''Edit the fields provided: '''<u>NOTE</u>''': Refer to '''[[#Add_Return_Parts|Add Return Parts]]''' for a detailed explanation of each category.'''
 
  
*''''''Receive#''''''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Subinventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Subinventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Subinventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Subinventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Subinventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Subinventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Subinventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Subinventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Subinventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Subinventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Subinventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Subinventory">Add Subinventory</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
*''''''Returned Qty''''''
 
*''''''Qty Uom''''''
 
*''''''Returned By''''''
 
*''''''Returned Date''''''
 
*''''''Status''''''
 
*''''''Remark''''''
 
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;4. Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.'''
+
To add an entry:
  
<br/> ''''''Figure 48: Edit Return Parts''''''
+
#Select '''Add''' from the Subinventory menu. The Add Subinventorypop-up window displays.
 +
#Complete the fields provided:  
  
'''[[File:Figure 48- Edit Return Parts1.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
+
*'''Name''': Assign a title to the sub inventory. (e.g. Shelf 1A; Store#2; Row 4; etc.)
 +
*'''Active''': Activate the checkbox to assign Active/Inactive status. Active = checked.  
 +
*'''Description''': Add any description that may be helpful to plant personnel.
  
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Return_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Return_Parts">Export Return Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
+
&nbsp; &nbsp;3. Select '''Save&nbsp;'''to finish or select '''Cancel''' to abort.<br/> ''&nbsp;''
  
'''To '''export ''' Return Parts data onto a local device:'''
+
'''Figure 23: Add Subinventory'''
  
#'''Select the information by activating the checkbox next to the entry.'''
+
'''[[File:Figure 23- Add Sub Inventory.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]'''
#'''Select '''Export''' from the '''Return Parts''' sub-module page (see '''Figure 46''' for the Export function’s location on the menu bar).'''
 
#'''A .csv file automatically downloads onto the user’s local drive.'''
 
#'''Open the file to rename, save, share, or print as desired.'''  
 
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
&nbsp;
  
=== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Adjust_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Adjust_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Adjust_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Adjust_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Adjust_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Adjust_Parts_Submodule">Adjust Parts Submodule</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ===
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory">Edit Sub Inventory</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
'''The '''Adjust Parts''' submodule is used to record any discrepancies in the actual number of parts recorded in the CMMS system.'''
+
To edit Sub Inventoryentries:
  
''''''Figure 49: Adjust Parts Submodule Icon''''''
+
#Select an entry from the Sub Inventorylist.
 +
#Select '''Edit''' from the menu. The Edit Sub Inventory pop-up window appears. This window is comprised of two tabs: Generaland Locator.
 +
#Edit any of the fields as needed:  
  
''''''[[File:Adjust Parts Submodule Icon.png|RTENOTITLE]]''''''
+
*Name
 +
*Active/Inactive [checkmark]  
 +
*Description
  
'''In the '''Adjust Parts '''submodule, users can '''search/filter, add, '''or&nbsp;'''edit '''data.'''
+
&nbsp;
  
''''''Figure 50: Main Menu: Adjust Parts''''''
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab">Edit Sub Inventory: Locator</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
  
'''[[File:Figure 50- Main Menu- Adjust Parts.png|900px|Figure 50- Main Menu- Adjust Parts.png]]'''
+
Within the Locator page, users may change Locator information connected to the selected Sub Inventory.
  
==== <br/> <br/> '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Adjust_Parts">Search/Filter Adjust Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
+
The following functions can be performed: '''Add, Edit,&nbsp;Activate/Deactivate''', and Export.
  
#'''Users may search for '''Adjust Parts''' entries according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the '''Adjust Parts''' Submodule:'''  
+
'''Figure 24: Edit Sub Inventory: Locator'''
  
*''''''Adjust#''': Search by the number assigned to the '''Adjust Parts''' entry. '''<u>NOTE</u>''': This number is automatically assigned when the entry is created.'''
+
'''''[[File:Figure 24- Edit Sub Inventory- Locator.png|border|800px|RTENOTITLE]]'''''
*''''''Part Number:''' A drop-down menu is available.'''
 
*''''''Sub Inventory''': Select the sub inventory using the drop-down menu.'''
 
*''''''Update Date From/Update Date To''': Select the time span the parts were adjusted by populating the drop-down calendars.'''
 
*''''''Status''': Search by the status of the '''Adjust Parts''' record: '''Pending''', '''Rejected''', or '''Cancelled'''.'''  
 
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;2. Select filtering option(s).<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;3. Choose the '''search icon''' (e.g. magnifying glass).'''
+
&nbsp;
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
=== <br/> <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory">Add a Locator to the Sub Inventory</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
  
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Adjust_Parts">Add Adjust Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
+
#Select '''Add''' from the Locator tabmenu. The '''Add Form''' pop-up window appears.
 +
#Complete the provided fields:
  
'''To '''add''' an entry to '''Adjust Parts''':'''
+
*'''Name''': Assign a title to the location. (e.g. Line 1; Building 3; Floor A; etc.)
 +
*'''Active''': Activate the checkbox to assign Active/Inactive status. Active is checked.
 +
*'''Description''': Add any description that may be helpful to plant personnel.
  
#'''Select Add from the Adjust Parts menu.'''
+
&nbsp; &nbsp;3. Select Save to complete or Cancel to abort.
#'''The '''Add Adjust Parts''' pop-up window displays.'''
 
#'''Complete the provided fields:'''
 
  
*''''''Part Number''' (Mandatory)&nbsp;Select the PN from the drop-down list'''
+
<br/> '''Figure 25: Add Locator to Sub Inventory'''
*''''''Sub Inventory''' (Mandatory) Select the Sub Inventory from the drop-down list'''
 
*''''''Locator''' (Mandatory)'''
 
*''''''Qty Uom''' (Optional)'''
 
*''''''System Qty''': This field is automatically populated when the user selects the location(s).'''
 
*''''''Actual Qty''': (Mandatory)'''
 
*''''''Approved By''': Select&nbsp;the administrator with approval permissions from the drop-down menu. '''<u>NOTE</u>''': Approvers are added to the system within the '''CMMS Admin''' portal: ('''Shop Floor Control > Configuration > CMMS Admin > Group > Add User''')'''
 
*''''''Status''': Select: Pending, Rejected, or Cancelled'''
 
*''''''Description '''(Optional)'''  
 
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;4. Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.'''
+
'''''[[File:Figure 25- Add Locator to Subinventory.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]'''''
  
''''''Figure 51: Add Adjust Parts''''''
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory">Edit a Locator in the Sub Inventory</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
  
''''''[[File:Figure 51- Add Adjust Parts1.png|RTENOTITLE]]''''''
+
#<span class="mw-headline" id=".27Select_an_entry_from_the_Locator_tab_listby_activating_the_checkmark_next_to_the_entry..27">Select an entry from the Locator tab listby activating the checkmark next to the entry.</span>
 
+
#Select '''Edit'''; the Edit Formpop-up window displays.  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
#''Edit the provided fields as needed:''  
 +
#Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Adjust_Parts">Edit Adjust Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar">Change Active Status: Menu Bar</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
  
'''To&nbsp;'''edit''' an '''Adjust Parts''' entry:'''
+
Locator Status can alternatively be changed from the '''Activate/Deactivate''' Icon located on the top menu bar .
  
#'''Select an entry from the '''Adjust Parts''' page. The '''Edit''' function is now available.'''
+
To change the active status:&nbsp;
#'''Select '''Edit'''. The '''Edit Adjust Parts''' pop-up window displays.'''
 
#'''Complete the provided fields.'''
 
  
''''''<u>Note</u>''': Fields are the same as those configured in the '''Add Adjust Parts''' function:'''
+
#Select an entry from the Locator tab listby activating the checkmark next to the entry.
 +
#Select the '''Activate/Deactivate''' icon.
  
*''''''Part Number''''''
+
&nbsp;
*''''''Sub Inventory''''''
 
*''''''Locator''''''
 
*''''''Qty Uom''''''
 
*''''''System Qty''''''
 
*''''''Actual Qty''''''
 
*''''''Approved By''''''
 
*''''''Status''''''
 
*''''''Description''''''
 
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;4. Select '''Save''' to complete or '''Cancel '''to abort.'''
+
&nbsp;
  
'''<u>'''Note'''</u>:&nbsp;1. The approver cannot be the person who requests this adjustment.'''
+
&nbsp;
  
'''&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;2. Only the creator and approver can edit the requested adjustment.'''
+
&nbsp;
  
''''''Figure 52: Edit Adjust Parts''''''
 
  
'''[[File:Figure 52- Edit Adjust Parts1.png|RTENOTITLE]]<br/> &nbsp;'''
 
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
= <span class="mw-headline" id="Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Scrap_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Scrap_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Scrap_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Scrap_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Scrap_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Scrap_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Scrap_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Scrap_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Scrap_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Scrap_Parts_Submodule">Scrap Parts[[File:Scrap parts icon1.png|Scrap parts icon.png]]</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> =
  
=== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Subinventory_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Subinventory_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Subinventory_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Subinventory_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Subinventory_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Subinventory_Submodule">Subinventory Submodule</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ===
+
<br/> Damaged parts that cannot be reused must be removed from the Cycle Count. The Scrap Partssubmodule manages these unusable parts. Scrap Partnumbers are reflected in the Cycle Countsubmodule. Within the ScrapParts&nbsp;submodule, users can perform the following functions: search, add, edit, and export.
  
''''''Figure 53: Subinventory Icon''''''
+
'''<u>Note</u>''': Scrap parts action happened at the shop floor, which means it won’t reduce qty again when scraped at Shop Floor, because the qty changed at the time of issuing parts.
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
<br/> '''Figure 26: Scrap Parts Main Menu'''
  
'''[[File:Figure 53- SubInventory Icon.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
+
'''[[File:Figure 26- Scrap Parts Main Page.png|border|900px|​Figure 59- Scrap Parts Main Menu.png]]'''
  
'''The '''Subinventory''' submodule of Spare Parts is useful for managing sites that house parts at multiple locations. In the '''Subinventory''' submodule, users can '''add''' and '''edit''' sub inventory locations; and mark sub inventory locations as '''Active/Inactive'''.'''
+
&nbsp;
  
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Subinventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Subinventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Subinventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Subinventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Subinventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Subinventory">Add Subinventory</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Scrap_Parts">Search/Filter Scrap Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
'''To '''add''' an entry:'''
+
&nbsp; &nbsp; 1. Users may search according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the Scrap PartsSubmodule:
  
#'''Select '''Add''' from the '''Subinventory''' menu. The '''Add Subinventory''' pop-up window displays.'''
+
*Scrap #  
#'''Complete the fields provided:'''
+
*Part Number
 +
*Scrapped Date From/Scrapped Date To: Drop down calendars allow the user to select the time frame when parts were scrapped.  
  
*''''''Name''': Assign a title to the sub inventory. (e.g. Shelf 1A; Store#2; Row 4; etc.)'''
+
&nbsp; &nbsp;2. Select filtering option(s).<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp;3. Choose the search icon(e.g. magnifying glass).
*''''''Active''': Activate the checkbox to assign Active/Inactive status. Active = checked.'''
 
*''''''Description''': Add any description that may be helpful to plant personnel.'''
 
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;3. Select '''Save''' to finish or select '''Cancel''' to abort.'''
+
&nbsp;
  
<br/> ''''''Figure 54: Add Subinventory''''''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts">Add Scrap Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
'''[[File:Add Sub Inventory2.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
+
To add a Scrap Part entry:
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
#Select '''Add''' from the Scrap Part menu. The Add Scrapping pop-up menu appears.
 +
#Complete the fields provided. Drop-down menus are available to aid some selections.
  
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory">Edit Sub Inventory</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
+
*Part Number: (Mandatory) Select the PN from a drop-down menu list.
 +
*Location: (Optional) Floor or building where the parts are housed. The drop-down menu bar provides a diagram with departments in a tree format.
 +
*Production Line: (Optional) Production line associated with the scrapped part(s).
 +
*Asset: (Mandatory) Machinery or equipment the scrap parts are assigned
 +
*Scrapped Date: (Mandatory) Date the part was removed from the system.
 +
*Qty Uom: (This field automatically populates) Quantity Unit of Measure.
 +
*Scrapped Qty: (Mandatory) # of PN being removed from inventory.
 +
*Currency: (Mandatory)Select the type of currency per country.
 +
*Unit Cost: (This field automatically populates) Cost per unit.
 +
*Confirmed By: (Optional)The operator completing the part transfer.
 +
*Description: (Optional) Additional information that may be useful to plant personnel.
  
'''To '''edit Sub Inventory''' entries:'''
+
&nbsp;3. Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.
  
#'''Select an entry from the '''Sub Inventory''' list.'''
+
'''Figure 27: Add Scrap Parts'''
#'''Select '''Edit''' from the menu. The Edit Sub Inventory pop-up window appears. This window is comprised of two tabs: '''General''' and '''Locator'''.'''  
 
  
===== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_General_Tab">Edit Sub Inventory: General Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' =====
+
'''''[[File:Figure 27- Add Scrap Parts.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]'''''
  
''''''Figure 55: Edit Sub Inventory: General Tab''''''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts">Edit Scrap Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
'''[[File:Edit Sub Inventory Part 1.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
+
To edit Scrap Partentries:
  
#'''Under the '''General tab''', '''edit''' any of the fields as needed:'''  
+
#Select an entry from the Scrap Partslist by activating the checkmark next to the line of data.
 +
#Select '''Edit'''. The Edit Scrapping pop-up window appears.
 +
#Edit&nbsp;the fields as needed from the preceding Add Scrap Partsaction:
 +
#Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.
  
*''''''Name''''''
+
&nbsp;
*''''''Active/Inactive [checkmark]''''''
 
*''''''Description''''''
 
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
= <span class="mw-headline" id="Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Reuse_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Reuse_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Reuse_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Reuse_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Reuse_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Reuse_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Reuse_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Reuse_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Reuse_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Reuse_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Reuse_Parts_Submodule">Reuse Parts&nbsp;[[File:Reuse parts icon1.png|Reuse parts icon.png]]</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> =
  
===== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Sub_Inventory:_Locator_Tab">Edit Sub Inventory: Locator Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>''' =====
+
Previously scrapped parts that have been refurbished for use and moved back into active inventory are managed within the Reuse Partssubmodule.
  
'''Within the '''Locator tab''', users may change Locator information connected to the selected Sub Inventory. The following functions can be performed: '''Add''', '''Edit''', mark as '''Inactive/Active''', and '''Export'''.'''
+
'''<u>Note</u>''': Activity within the Reuse Partssubmodule is reflected in the Cycle Countsubmodule; adding a shelved part to the Reusecategory increases inventory in Cycle Count.
  
''''''Figure 56: Edit Sub Inventory: Locator Tab''''''
+
On the Reuse Partspage, users can perform the following functions: search,add, edit, and export.
  
''''''[[File:Figure 56 Edit Sub Inventory- Locator Tab.png|border|800px|RTENOTITLE]]''''''
+
'''Figure 28: Reuse Parts Menu Bar'''
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
[[File:Figure 28- Reuse Parts Menu Bar.png|border|900px|Figure 63- Reuse Parts Menu Bar.png]]
  
====== <br/> '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_a_Locator_to_the_Sub_Inventory">Add a Locator to the Sub Inventory</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ======
+
== <br/> <span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Resue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Resue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Resue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Resue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Resue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Resue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Resue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Resue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Resue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Resue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Resue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Resue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Resue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Resue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Resue_Parts">Search/Filter Resue Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
#'''Select '''Add''' from the '''Locator tab''' menu. The '''Add Form''' pop-up window appears.'''
+
#Users may search according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the Reuse Partssubmodule:  
#'''Complete the provided fields:'''
 
  
*''''''Name''': Assign a title to the location. (e.g. Line 1; Building 3; Floor A; etc.)'''
+
*New PN: Drop-down menu offers additional choices: Part Number, MFG PN, or AVL MFG.  
*''''''Active''': Activate the checkbox to assign Active/Inactive status. Active is checked.'''
+
*Old PN: Drop-down menu offers additional choices: Part Number, MFG PN, or AVL MFG.  
*''''''Description''': Add any description that may be helpful to plant personnel.'''
+
*Status: Drop-down calendar offers additional choices: Pending, Completed, or Cancelled.  
 +
*Reuse#: Enter the quantity of Reused partsassociated with the PN
 +
*Updated Date From/Updated Date To: Drop-down calendar is available.  
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;3. Select '''Save''' to complete or '''Cancel''' to abort.'''
+
&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;2. Select filtering option(s).<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;3. Choose the search icon(e.g. magnifying glass).
  
<br/> ''''''Figure 56a: Add Locator to Sub Inventory''''''
+
&nbsp;
  
''''''[[File:Add Locator to Sub Inventory.png|RTENOTITLE]]''''''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts">Add Reuse Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
====== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Locator_in_the_Sub_Inventory">Edit a Locator in the Sub Inventory</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ======
+
To add a Reused Partentry:
  
#'''Select an entry from the '''Locator tab list''' by activating the checkmark next to the entry.'''
+
#Select '''ADD REUSE PARTS''' from the Reused Parts menu. The Add Reuse Partspop-up menu displays.  
#'''Select '''Edit'''; the '''Edit Form''' pop-up window displays.'''
+
#Enter the Old PNor choose from the list of Part Numbersprovided in the drop-down menu.  
#''''''Edit''' the provided fields as needed:'''
+
#Additional fields are populated by selecting a PN.
  
*''''''Name''''''
+
'''Figure 29: Add Reuse Parts Drop-down Menu'''<br/> ''[[File:Figure 29- Add Reuse Parts.png|border|700px|RTENOTITLE]]''
*''''''Active [checkbox]''': To change the status to inactive, remove the checkmark. '''<u>NOTE</u>''': Completing this action will remove the blue checkmark in the sub Inventory list for that Locator.'''
 
*''''''Description''''''  
 
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;4. Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.'''
+
&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;4. Complete the fields provided. Drop-down menus are available to aid some selections.<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;5. Mandatory fields are Sub Inventoryand Locator.
  
''''''Figure 56b: Edit Locator in Sub Inventory''''''
+
*New PN: (Mandatory field) Select the new PN to assign to the refurbished part
 +
*Old PN: (Mandatory field) Select the PN assigned to the original part from the drop-down menu
 +
*Sub Inventory (Mandatory field)
 +
*Locator (Mandatory field)
 +
*Production Line
 +
*Repaired By
 +
*Confirmed By
 +
*Qty Uom
 +
*Reused Qty(Mandatory field)
 +
*Vendor Currency&nbsp;(Mandatory field)
 +
*Unit Price
 +
*Cost Saving(Mandatory field)
 +
*Status:(Mandatory field) Choose Pendingor Completed.
 +
*Description
  
'''[[File:Edit Locator in Sub Inventory.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
+
&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;6. Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
&nbsp;
  
<br/> ''''''Figure 57: Change Active/Inactive Status''''''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Reuse_Parts">Edit Reuse Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
''''''[[File:Inactive Active Status for Edit a Locator.png|RTENOTITLE]]''''''
+
To edit entries:
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
#Select an entry from the Reuse Partslist.
 +
#Select '''Edit'''. The Edit Reuse Partspop-up window appears.
 +
#Users may edit&nbsp;the fields associated with a given Part Number:
 +
#Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.
  
====== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar"><span class="mw-headline" id="Change_Active_Status:_Menu_Bar">Change Active Status: Menu Bar</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ======
+
&nbsp;
  
'''Locator Status can alternatively be changed from the '''Enable/Disable Icon''' located on the top menu bar of the '''Edit Sub Inventory Tab'''. To change the active status:&nbsp;'''
+
&nbsp;
 
 
#'''Select an entry from the '''Locator tab list''' by activating the checkmark next to the entry.'''
 
#'''Select the '''Enable/Disable icon'''.'''
 
 
 
''''''<u>Note</u>''': Within the Locator tab, active/inactive status is selected by marking the checkmark on the top menu bar.'''
 
 
 
''''''Figure 57a: Active/Inactive Status''''''
 
 
 
''''''[[File:Figure 57a- Active Inactive Status.png|RTENOTITLE]]''''''
 
 
 
====== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Sub_Inventory_Information"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Sub_Inventory_Information"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Sub_Inventory_Information"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Sub_Inventory_Information"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Sub_Inventory_Information"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Sub_Inventory_Information"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Sub_Inventory_Information"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Sub_Inventory_Information"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Sub_Inventory_Information"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Sub_Inventory_Information">Export Sub Inventory Information</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ======
 
 
 
#'''Select the desired information by activating the checkbox next to the entry.'''
 
#'''Select '''Export''' from the '''Locator tab''' menu.[[File:Export Icon.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
 
#'''The exported file will automatically download onto the local drive in .csv format.'''
 
#'''Open the .csv and rename, save, file, or print as desired.'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
 
 
=== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Scrap_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Scrap_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Scrap_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Scrap_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Scrap_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Scrap_Parts_Submodule">Scrap Parts Submodule</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ===
 
 
 
''''''Figure 58: Scrap Parts Icon'''<br/> [[File:Scrap Parts Submodule Icon.png|RTENOTITLE]]<br/> Damaged parts that cannot be reused must be removed from the '''Cycle Count'''. The '''Scrap Parts''' submodule manages these unusable parts. '''Scrap Part''' numbers are reflected in the '''Cycle Count''' submodule. Within the '''Scrap''' '''Parts'''&nbsp;submodule, users can perform the following functions: '''search''', '''add''', '''edit''', and '''export'''.'''
 
 
 
'''<u>'''Note'''</u>: Scrap parts action happened at the shop floor, which means it won’t reduce qty again when scraped at Shop Floor, because the qty changed at the time of issuing parts.'''
 
 
 
<br/> ''''''Figure 59: Scrap Parts Main Menu''''''
 
 
 
'''[[File:​Figure 59- Scrap Parts Main Menu.png|900px|​Figure 59- Scrap Parts Main Menu.png]]'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
 
 
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Scrap_Parts">Search/Filter Scrap Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
 
 
 
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;1. Users may search according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the '''Scrap Parts''' Submodule:'''
 
  
*''''''Scrap #''''''
 
*''''''Part Number''''''
 
*''''''Scrapped Date From/Scrapped Date To''': Drop down calendars allow the user to select the time frame when parts were scrapped.'''
 
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;2. Select filtering option(s).<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;3. Choose the '''search icon''' (e.g. magnifying glass).'''
 
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
= <span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count_Submodule">Cycle Count&nbsp;[[File:CMMS cycle count.png|CMMS cycle count.png]]</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> =
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
The Cycle Count submodule provides a paperless solution for the inventory process. Cycle counts are completed on a regular basis (e.g. daily, weekly, every third Monday, etc.) as determined by the needs of the plants. Within Cycle Count, employees count and record their plant’s machine parts. Cycle counts are always completed based upon the sub-inventory locations where machine parts are located within the manufacturing plant. Administrators can restrict access to approved users to control inventory costs.'
 
 
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Scrap_Parts">Add Scrap Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
 
 
 
'''​To '''add''' a Scrap Part entry:'''
 
 
 
#'''Select '''Add''' from the Scrap Part menu. The '''Add Scrapping''' pop-up menu appears.'''
 
#'''Complete the fields provided. Drop-down menus are available to aid some selections.'''
 
 
 
*''''''Part Number''': (Mandatory) Select the PN from a drop-down menu list.'''
 
*''''''Location''': (Mandatory) Floor or building where the parts are housed. The drop-down menu bar provides a diagram with departments in a tree format.'''
 
*''''''Production Line''': (Optional) Production line associated with the scrapped part(s).'''
 
*''''''Asset''': (Mandatory) Machinery or equipment the scrap parts are assigned'''
 
*''''''Scrapped Date''': (Mandatory) Date the part was removed from the system.'''
 
*''''''Qty Uom''': (This field automatically populates) Quantity Unit of Measure.'''
 
*''''''Scrapped Qty''': (Mandatory) # of PN being removed from inventory.'''
 
*''''''Currency''': (Optional)Select the type of currency per country.'''
 
*''''''Unit Cost''': (This field automatically populates) Cost per unit.'''
 
*''''''Confirmed By''': (Optional)The operator completing the part transfer.'''
 
*''''''Description''': (Optional) Additional information that may be useful to plant personnel.'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;3. Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.'''
 
 
 
''''''Figure 60: Add Scrap Parts''''''
 
 
 
''''''[[File:Figure 60- Add Scrap Parts1.png|RTENOTITLE]]''''''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
 
 
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Scrap_Parts">Edit Scrap Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
 
 
 
'''To '''edit Scrap Part''' entries:'''
 
 
 
#'''Select an entry from the '''Scrap Parts''' list by activating the checkmark next to the line of data.'''
 
#'''Select '''Edit'''. The '''Edit Scrapping''' pop-up window appears.'''
 
#'''Edit any of the fields from the preceding '''Add Scrap Parts''' action:'''
 
 
 
*''''''Part Number''''''
 
*''''''Location''''''
 
*''''''Production Line''''''
 
*''''''Asset''''''
 
*''''''Scrapped Date''''''
 
*''''''Qty Uom''''''
 
*''''''Scrapped Qty''''''
 
*''''''Currency''''''
 
*''''''Unit Cost''''''
 
*''''''Confirmed By''''''
 
*''''''Description''''''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;4. Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.'''
 
 
 
<br/> ''''''Figure 61: Edit Scrap Parts&nbsp;''' '''<u>Note</u>''': This information mirrors the information in '''Figure 60'''.'''
 
 
 
'''[[File:Figure 61- Edit Scrap Parts1.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
 
 
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Scrap_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Scrap_Parts">Export Scrap Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
 
 
 
'''To '''export''' information onto a local device:'''
 
 
 
#'''Activate the checkbox next to the line of information you’d like to export.'''
 
#'''Select '''Export''' from the '''Scrap Parts''' sub-module page.'''
 
#'''A .csv file automatically downloads onto the user’s local drive.'''
 
#'''The user may open and rename, save, or print as desired.'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
 
 
=== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Reuse_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Reuse_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Reuse_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Reuse_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Reuse_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Reuse_Parts_Submodule">Reuse Parts Submodule</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ===
 
 
 
'''Previously scrapped parts that have been refurbished for use and moved back into active inventory are managed within the '''Reuse Parts''' submodule.'''
 
 
 
'''<u>'''Note'''</u>: Activity within the '''Reuse Parts''' submodule is reflected in the '''Cycle Count''' submodule; adding a shelved part to the '''Reuse''' category increases inventory in '''Cycle Count'''.'''
 
 
 
''''''Figure 62: Reuse Parts Icon'''<br/> [[File:Reuse Parts Submodule Icon.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
 
 
 
#'''On the '''Reuse Parts''' page, users can perform the following functions: '''search,''' '''add''', '''edit''', and '''export'''.'''
 
 
 
''''''Figure 63: Reuse Parts Menu Bar''''''
 
 
 
'''[[File:Figure 63- Reuse Parts Menu Bar.png|border|900px|Figure 63- Reuse Parts Menu Bar.png]]'''
 
 
 
==== <br/> '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Resue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Resue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Resue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Resue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Resue_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Resue_Parts">Search/Filter Resue Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
 
 
 
#'''Users may search according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the '''Reuse Parts''' submodule:'''
 
 
 
*''''''New PN''': Drop-down menu offers additional choices: '''Part Number''', '''MFG PN''', or '''AVL MFG'''.'''
 
*''''''Old PN''': Drop-down menu offers additional choices: '''Part Number''', '''MFG PN''', or '''AVL MFG'''.'''
 
*''''''Status''': Drop-down calendar offers additional choices: '''Pending''', '''Completed''', or '''Cancelled'''.'''
 
*''''''Reuse#''': Enter the quantity of '''Reused parts''' associated with the PN'''
 
*''''''Updated Date From/Updated Date To''': Drop-down calendar is available.'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;2. Select filtering option(s).<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;3. Choose the '''search icon''' (e.g. magnifying glass).'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
 
 
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Reuse_Parts">Add Reuse Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
 
 
 
'''To add a '''Reused Part''' entry:'''
 
 
 
#'''Select '''Add''' from the '''Reused Parts''' menu. The '''Add Reuse Parts''' pop-up menu displays.'''
 
#'''Enter the '''Old PN''' or choose from the list of '''Part Numbers''' provided in the drop-down menu.'''
 
#'''Additional fields are populated by selecting a '''PN'''.'''
 
 
 
''''''Figure 64: Add Reuse Parts Drop-down Menu'''<br/> [[File:Figure 64- Add Reuse Parts Drop-down Menu1.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;4. Complete the fields provided. Drop-down menus are available to aid some selections.<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;5. Mandatory fields are '''Sub Inventory''' and '''Locator'''.'''
 
 
 
*''''''New PN''': (Mandatory field) Select the new PN to assign to the refurbished part'''
 
*''''''Old PN''': (Mandatory field) Select the PN assigned to the original part from the drop-down menu'''
 
*''''''Sub Inventory''' (Mandatory field)'''
 
*''''''Locator''' (Mandatory field)'''
 
*''''''Production Line''''''
 
*''''''Repaired By''''''
 
*''''''Confirmed By''''''
 
*''''''Qty Uom''''''
 
*''''''Reused Qty''''''
 
*''''''Vendor Currency''''''
 
*''''''Unit Price''''''
 
*''''''Cost Saving''''''
 
*''''''Status''': Choose '''Pending''' or '''Completed'''.'''
 
*''''''Description''''''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;6. Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.'''
 
 
 
''''''Figure 65: Add Reuse Parts''''''
 
 
 
''''''[[File:Add Resue Parts.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]''''''
 
 
 
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Reuse_Parts">Edit Reuse Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
 
 
 
'''To '''edit''' entries:'''
 
 
 
#'''Select an entry from the '''Reuse Parts''' list.'''
 
#'''Select '''Edit'''. The '''Edit Reuse Parts''' pop-up window appears.'''
 
#'''Users may edit any of the fields associated with a given Part Number:'''
 
 
 
*''''''New PN''''''
 
*''''''Old PN''''''
 
*''''''Sub Inventory''''''
 
*''''''Locator''''''
 
*''''''Production Line''''''
 
*''''''Repaired By''''''
 
*''''''Confirmed By''''''
 
*''''''Qty Uom''''''
 
*''''''Reused Qty''''''
 
*''''''Vendor Currency''''''
 
*''''''Unit Price''''''
 
*''''''Cost Saving''''''
 
*''''''Status''': Choose '''Pending''' or '''Completed''''''
 
*''''''Description''''''
 
 
 
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Reuse_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Reuse_Parts">Export Reuse Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
 
 
 
<br/> '''To '''Export''':'''
 
 
 
#'''Select the file by activating the checkmark next to the entry.'''
 
#'''Select '''Export''' from '''Reuse Part'''’s main menu.'''
 
#'''The exported file will automatically download onto the local drive-in .csv format.'''
 
#'''The user may open the .csv file and rename, save, or print as desired.'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
 
 
 
 
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Cycle_Count_Submodule">Cycle Count Submodule&nbsp;</span></span></span></span></span></span></span>[[File:Cycle Count Submodule Icon.png|90px|RTENOTITLE]] ===
 
 
 
The Cycle Count submodule provides a paperless solution for the inventory process. Cycle counts are completed on a regular basis (e.g. daily, weekly, every third Monday, etc.) as determined by the needs of the plants. Within Cycle Count, employees count and record their plant’s machine parts. Cycle counts are always completed based upon the sub-inventory locations where machine parts are located within the manufacturing plant. Administrators can restrict access to approved users to control inventory costs.
 
  
 
From the Cycle Count page, users can perform the following functions: search, add, operate, delete, and export.
 
From the Cycle Count page, users can perform the following functions: search, add, operate, delete, and export.
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
&nbsp;
  
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count">Search/Filter Cycle Count</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ====
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Cycle_Count">Search/Filter Cycle Count</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-2faab935-f2f4-d72f-d5a6-02ad2f051060">A list of all Plan Items (Planned Cycle Counts) displays. Plan Items are listed by the name designated.</span>'''
+
<span id="docs-internal-guid-2faab935-f2f4-d72f-d5a6-02ad2f051060">A list of all Plan Items (Planned Cycle Counts) displays. Plan Items are listed by the name designated.</span>
  
''''''Figure 67: Cycle Count Menu Bar''''''
+
'''Figure 30: Cycle Count Menu Bar'''
  
'''[[File:Figure 67- Cycle Count Menu Bar.png|border|900px|Figure 67- Cycle Count Menu Bar.png]]'''
+
[[File:Figure 30- Cycle Count Menu Bar.png|border|900px|Figure 67- Cycle Count Menu Bar.png]]
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
&nbsp;
  
'''Users may limit their search with the following filter options, located on the screen’s top menu:'''
+
Users may limit their search with the following filter options, located on the screen’s top menu:
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
*Plan Name: Search by the Plan Name’s Title.''  
 +
*Approve By: A drop-down menu allows the user to select Plan Names according to the employee who approved the Plan Item. <u>NOTE</u>: The “Approve By”column in the Cycle Countpage refers to the user authorized to approve the cycle count. Typically, this user will hold an administrative position.''  
 +
*Status: Search for the Plan Name by its status. A drop-down menu offers the following choices:''  
 +
**'''Planned'''
 +
**'''Opening'''
 +
**'''Planned Items Generated'''
 +
**'''Closed''' 
  
*''''''Plan Name''': Search by the Plan Name’s Title.'''
+
&nbsp;
*''''''Approve By''': A drop-down menu allows the user to select Plan Names according to the employee who approved the Plan Item. '''<u>NOTE</u>''': The '''“Approve By”'''column in the '''Cycle Count'''page refers to the user authorized to approve the cycle count. Typically, this user will hold an administrative position.'''
 
*''''''Status''': Search for the Plan Name by its status. A drop-down menu offers the following choices:'''
 
  
#''''''Planned''''''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count">Add Cycle Count</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
#''''''Opening''''''
 
#''''''Planned Items Generated''''''
 
#''''''Closed''''''
 
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bc1-dba4-ba6a-dd79e5c2dd3d">Here, Users create the general parameters for their cycle count and create a name for the Cycle Count.</span>'''<u>Note</u>''': The actual tallying process is not completed in this field. Only the Cycle count plan name and parameters are selected here.
 +
<div>To add a Cycle Count entry:</div>
 +
#Select '''Add''' from the Cycle Countmenu bar. The Add Cycle Count pop-up window displays.
 +
#Complete the fields provided. Drop-down menus are available to aid some selections.
  
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Cycle_Count">Add Cycle Count</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span> ====
+
*Plan Name: (Mandatory) Enter a Title for the inventory being counted. Plan Name is based on the location of the items being counted (i.e. Floor #1)''  
 +
*Max Locators Per Item: (Mandatory) Enter the total number of physical locations <span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bc2-d6e9-1073-dd46b81df498">within the subinventory where the parts to be counted reside</span>&nbsp;(e.g. If parts being counted are located on 3 shelves in Building 1; and 2 shelves in Building 2, the Max Locator = 5).''
 +
*Approved By: (Mandatory)&nbsp;<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bc3-8220-f03f-ee137e37ef70">Select the supervisor who will approve the cycle count after it is completed.</span><u>NOTE</u>: The employee who creates the cycle count cannot select himself as the Approverfor that cycle count.''
 +
*Description: (Optional)&nbsp;<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bc4-10db-bcd2-b93c2d704b49">Add any other directions needed to complete the cycle count.</span>''  
  
'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bc1-dba4-ba6a-dd79e5c2dd3d">Here, Users create the general parameters for their cycle count and create a name for the Cycle Count.</span>'''<u>NOTE</u>''': The actual tallying process is not completed in this field. Only the Cycle count plan name and parameters are selected here.'''
+
&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;3. Select '''Save''' to finish or '''Cancel''' to abort.
<div>'''To '''add'''a Cycle Count entry:'''</div>
 
#'''Select '''Add'''from the '''Cycle Count'''menu bar. The '''Add Cycle'''Count pop-up window displays.'''  
 
#'''Complete the fields provided. Drop-down menus are available to aid some selections.'''
 
  
*''''''Plan Name''': (Mandatory) Enter a Title for the inventory being counted. Plan Name is based on the location of the items being counted (i.e. Floor #1)'''
+
'''Figure 31: Add Cycle Count'''
*''''''Max Locators Per Item''': (Optional) Enter the total number of physical locations <span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bc2-d6e9-1073-dd46b81df498">within the subinventory where the parts to be counted reside</span>&nbsp;(e.g. If parts being counted are located on 3 shelves in Building 1; and 2 shelves in Building 2, the Max Locator = 5).'''
 
*''''''Approved By''': (Mandatory)&nbsp;<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bc3-8220-f03f-ee137e37ef70">Select the supervisor who will approve the cycle count after it is completed.</span>'''<u>NOTE</u>''': The employee who creates the cycle count cannot select himself as the '''Approver'''for that cycle count.'''
 
*''''''Description''': (Optional)&nbsp;<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bc4-10db-bcd2-b93c2d704b49">Add any other directions needed to complete the cycle count.</span>'''  
 
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;3. Select '''Save'''to finish or '''Cancel'''to abort.'''
+
[[File:Figure 31- Add Cycle Count.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]
  
''''''Figure 68: Add Cycle Count''''''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count">Edit Cycle Count</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
'''[[File:Figure 68- Add Cycle Count.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
+
After users define a plan, they may edit the Cycle Count and begin the inventory process. To edit Cycle Count Plan:
  
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count">Operate Cycle Count</span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span> ====
+
#'''Select''' an entry from the '''Plan Name''' list.
 +
#Select '''Edit''' from the top menu bar menu. The Edit Cycle Count pop-up window displays. . The Edit Cycle Countwindow is comprised of the following tabs: General, Sub Inventory, and Plan Items.
 +
#User may edit&nbsp; the fields as needed&nbsp;completed when the Cycle Count Plan was originally added to the system.
  
'''After users define a plan, they may '''Operate the Cycle Count'''and begin the inventory process. To '''operate'''a '''Cycle Count Plan''':'''
+
&nbsp;
  
#'''Select an entry from the '''Plan Name'''list.'''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab">Edit Cycle Count: Plan Items</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
#'''Select '''Operate'''from the top menu bar menu. The '''Operate Cycle Count'''pop-up window displays. (see '''Figure 69'''). The '''Operate Cycle Count'''window is comprised of the following tabs: '''General''', '''Sub Inventory''', and '''Plan Items'''.'''
 
  
===== <span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count_General_Tab">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count_General_Tab">Operate Cycle Count General Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span> =====
+
The Plan Items page is the powerhouse of the Cycle Counts submodule. Within the Plan Items page, cycle counts are recorded and approved. Here, users can edit plan items, create a plan item, approve plan items, export plan items, or delete plan items.
  
#'''Under the '''General'''tab, the user may edit any of the fields completed when the Cycle Count Plan was originally added to the system:'''  
+
'''Figure 32: Actions available in Edit Cycle Count: Plan Items Tab'''<br/> ''[[File:Figure 32- Edit Cycle Count- Plan Items.png|border|900px|RTENOTITLE]]''
  
*''''''Plan Name''''''
+
#To'''Create a Plan Item''':
*''''''Max Locators''''''
 
*''''''Approve By''''''
 
*''''''Description''''''  
 
  
''''''Figure 69: Operate Cycle Count: General Tab''''''
+
*Choose the '''Add''' icon.
 +
*A message window displays, allowing users to confirm the action.
 +
*Choose '''Yes''' to create a plan item or '''No''' to cancel the action.
 +
*<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bc6-b713-170a-5f50f0a88675">A new Plan Item with the predefined parameters will display on the list page.&nbsp;</span>
  
''''''[[File:Operate Cycle Count General Tab2.png|RTENOTITLE]]''''''
+
'''<u>Note</u>''': Plan Items can only be created from Plans in Opening or Planned status.
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
'''<u>Note</u>''': Users must first assign a Sub Inventory to a Plan Item before the system allows them to Create a Plan Item.
  
===== <span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Sub_Inventory_Tab">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Sub_Inventory_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Sub_Inventory_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Sub_Inventory_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Sub_Inventory_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Sub_Inventory_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Sub_Inventory_Tab">Operate Cycle Count: Sub Inventory Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span> =====
+
&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;2. Edit a Plan Item:&nbsp;<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bc8-c4ab-fa2f-b42044f508ba">Whereas previous Cycle Count tabs are used to configure Cycle Count information, the Edit feature is used to execute a cycle count, and is comprised of four subtabs:</span>General, Locators, Cycle Count, and Adjust In/Out. Some of the tabs need to be completed in a specific order (see notes below).&nbsp;<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bc9-e473-a285-043ed89018d0">The</span>Edit feature allows users to adjust quantities (Cycle Count), approve cycle counts (Adjust In/Out), and export locator details (Locators).
  
'''Under the '''Sub Inventory tab''', users may '''add'''or '''delete'''sub inventory locations associated with the Locator.'''
+
&nbsp;
 
+
<div>
#'''To '''Add''':'''
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators">Edit Plan Items : Locators</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
 
 
*'''Select '''Add'''from the Sub Inventory tab menu. The '''Add Sub Inventory'''pop-up window appears ('''Figure 70''').'''
 
*'''Select a '''Sub Inventory'''from the drop-down list.'''
 
*'''Select '''Save'''to finish or '''Cancel'''to abort.'''
 
 
 
<u>Note</u>''': If no sub inventory locations are added to the '''Plan Item''', the user cannot '''Create a Plan Item'''.'''
 
 
 
''''''Figure 70: Operate Cycle Count Plan: Sub Inventory Tab: Add a Sub Inventory''''''
 
 
 
''''''[[File:Operate Cycle Count Sub Inventory Tab.png|RTENOTITLE]]''' &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;2. To '''Delete a Sub Inventory''':'''
 
 
 
*'''Select an entry from the '''Sub Inventory tab'''list.'''
 
*'''Select '''Delete'''. The selected entry is now removed from the list.'''
 
 
 
''''''Figure 71: Delete Sub Inventory''''''
 
 
 
''''''[[File:Delete Sub Inventory.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]''''''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
 
 
===== <span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Operate_Cycle_Count:_Plan_Items_Tab">Operate Cycle Count: Plan Items Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span> =====
 
 
 
'''The '''Plan Items Tab'''is the powerhouse of the '''Cycle Counts'''submodule. Within the '''Plan Items'''tab, cycle counts are recorded and approved. Here, users can '''edit plan items''', '''create a plan item''', '''approve plan items''', '''export plan items''', or '''delete plan items'''.'''
 
 
 
''''''Figure 72: Actions available in Edit Cycle Count: Plan Items Tab'''<br/> [[File:Figure 72- Actions available in Edit Cycle Count- Plan Items Tab.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
 
 
 
#'''To '''Create a Plan Item''':'''
 
 
 
*'''Choose the '''Add icon'''.'''
 
*'''A message window displays, allowing users to confirm the action.'''
 
*'''Choose '''Yes'''to create a plan item or '''No'''to cancel the action.'''
 
*'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bc6-b713-170a-5f50f0a88675">A new Plan Item with the predefined parameters will display on the list page.&nbsp;</span>'''
 
 
 
<u>Note</u>''': Plan Items can only be created from Plans in Opening or Planned status.'''
 
 
 
<u>Note</u>''': Users must first assign a Sub Inventory to a Plan Item before the system allows them to '''Create a Plan Item'''.'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;2. To '''Export'''a '''Plan Item''':'''
 
 
 
*'''Select the entry by activating the checkbox next to its name.'''
 
*'''Choose the '''Export icon'''.'''
 
*'''Information will automatically download as a .csv file onto the user’s local drive.'''
 
*'''Users may open, rename, share, or print as desired.'''
 
 
 
<u><span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bc7-c8b0-4b02-a186550c44fe">Note</span></u>''': Plants may use the export feature to print the list of parts to be counted for operators to attach to a clipboard.'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;3. To '''Delete '''a&nbsp;'''Plan Item''':'''
 
 
 
*'''Select the entry by activating the checkbox next to its name.'''
 
*'''Choose the '''Delete icon'''on the top menu bar.'''
 
*'''A message window displays, allowing users to confirm the action.'''
 
*'''Select '''Yes'''to confirm or '''No'''to cancel the action.'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;4. '''Edit a Plan Item:&nbsp;'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bc8-c4ab-fa2f-b42044f508ba">Whereas previous Cycle Count tabs are used to configure Cycle Count information, the Edit feature is used to execute a cycle count, and is comprised of four subtabs:</span>'''General''', '''Locators''', '''Cycle Count''', and '''Adjust In/Out'''. Some of the tabs need to be completed in a specific order (see notes below).&nbsp;<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bc9-e473-a285-043ed89018d0">The</span>'''Edit'''feature allows users to adjust quantities ('''Cycle Count'''), approve cycle counts ('''Adjust In/Out'''), add descriptions ('''General'''), and export locator details ('''Locators''').'''
 
 
 
''''''Figure 73: Edit Plan Item Sub-Tabs''''''
 
 
 
''''''[[File:Edit Plan Item Tabs.png|RTENOTITLE]]''''''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
  
====== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Item_Sub-Tab:_General_Tab">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Item_Sub-Tab:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Item_Sub-Tab:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Item_Sub-Tab:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Item_Sub-Tab:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Item_Sub-Tab:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Item_Sub-Tab:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Item_Sub-Tab:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Item_Sub-Tab:_General_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Item_Sub-Tab:_General_Tab">Edit Plan Item Sub-Tab: General Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span> ======
+
Within the Locators page, users can export&nbsp;information about a selected Locatorand its corresponding Sub Inventory in a .csv file onto their local drives.
 +
<div>To '''Export''':</div>  
 +
#Mark the entry by activating the checkbox next to the line of information.
 +
#Select the '''Export''' function.
 +
#Information will automatically download in a .csv file onto the user’s local drive.
 +
#Users may open the file, rename, save, share, or print as desired.
  
'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bce-47b0-fde2-2fe1a9b92112">The</span>'''General Tab'''is comprised of an open text box with a&nbsp;'''Description'''label. Here, operators may include any special notes pertaining to the cycle count.'''
+
'''Figure 33: Edit Cycle Count:&nbsp; Plan Items export Locators'''
<div>''''''Figure 74: Plan Item General Subtab'''<br/> [[File:Plan Item General Subtab.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''</div> <div>'''&nbsp;'''</div> <div>
 
====== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Locators">Edit Plan Items Sub-Tab: Locators</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span> ======
 
  
'''Within the '''Locators'''tab, users can '''export'''&nbsp;information about a selected '''Locator'''and its corresponding Sub Inventory in a .csv file onto their local drives.'''
+
[[File:Figure 33- Edit Cycle Count- Plan Items export Locators.png|border|800px]]
<div>'''To '''Export''':'''</div>
 
#'''Mark the entry by activating the checkbox next to the line of information.'''
 
#'''Select the '''Export'''function.'''
 
#'''Information will automatically download in a .csv file onto the user’s local drive.'''
 
#'''Users may open the file, rename, save, share, or print as desired.'''
 
 
</div>  
 
</div>  
===== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items">Edit Plan Items Sub-Tab: Cycle Count Items&nbsp;</span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span> =====
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Cycle_Count_Items">Edit Plan Items: Cycle Count Items&nbsp;</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
  
'''Within the '''Cycle Count Items'''sub-tab users complete the inventory process. Users can:'''
+
Within the Cycle Count Items page users complete the inventory process. Users can:
  
#''''''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bd2-e749-6bc6-a4f3fcf7d018">Search</span>''' for a Cycle count according to its status: '''Planned/Completed''''''
+
#'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bd2-e749-6bc6-a4f3fcf7d018">Search</span>''' for a Cycle count according to its status: Planned/Completed  
#''''''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bd2-e749-6bc6-a4f3fcf7d018">Export</span>''' a .csv file of Cycle Count details onto their local drive to print, share or save. Plants may use this feature to print a hard copy of the items for inventory, and tally using traditional pen and paper in the physical location.'''  
+
#'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bd2-e749-6bc6-a4f3fcf7d018">Export</span>''' a .csv file of Cycle Count details onto their local drive to print, share or save. Plants may use this feature to print a hard copy of the items for inventory, and tally using traditional pen and paper in the physical location.''  
  
''''''Figure 75: Edit Plan Item: Cycle Count Menu''''''
+
'''Figure 34: Edit Plan Item: Cycle Count Menu'''
  
''''''[[File:Edit Plan Item Cycle Count Menu.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]''''''
+
[[File:Figure 34- Edit Plan Item- Cycle Count Menu.png|border|800px|RTENOTITLE]]
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
&nbsp;
  
'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bd4-08b9-bb3b-330d69fb2183">If additional part numbers not specified in the original Plan Item require counting, users may add them to the Plan Item using the</span>'''Add'''feature.'''
+
<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bd4-08b9-bb3b-330d69fb2183">If additional part numbers not specified in the original Plan Item require counting, users may add them to the Plan Item using the</span>Add feature.
  
#'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bd4-08b9-bb3b-330d69fb2183">To</span>'''Add Part Numbers'''to a '''Cycle Count'''Item:'''
+
#<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bd4-08b9-bb3b-330d69fb2183">To&nbsp;</span>'''Add Part Numbers&nbsp;'''to a Cycle Count Item:  
  
*'''Select the Plan Item by highlighting the entry.'''
+
*Select the Plan Item by highlighting the entry.  
*'''Choose the '''Add icon'''from the top menu bar.'''
+
*Choose the '''Add''' icon from the top menu bar.  
*'''This choice activates a pop-up window: '''Add Cycle Count Item'''(see '''Figure''', below)'''
+
*This choice activates a pop-up window: Add Cycle Count Item(see Figure, below)  
*'''Complete the fields provided: '''  
+
*Complete the fields provided: '''  
**''''''Part Number''''''
+
**Part Number  
**''''''Sub Inventory Locator&nbsp;'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bd5-b9c8-3330-f78d88bc8b98">(</span>'''<u>NOTE</u>''': Only the &nbsp;'''Sub Inventory/Locators'''defined in the Plan Item are available for selection).'''  
+
**Locator&nbsp;<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bd5-b9c8-3330-f78d88bc8b98">(</span>'''<u>Note</u>''': Only the &nbsp;Sub Inventory/Locatorsdefined in the Plan Item are available for selection).''  
**''''''Actual Qty''''''
+
**Actual Qty  
**''''''Qty Uom: (Quantity Unit of Measure) '''This field automatically populates when Part Number is selected.'''   
+
**Qty Uom: (Quantity Unit of Measure) This field automatically populates when Part Number is selected.''   
  
<u>Note:</u>'''All fields are mandatory.'''
+
<u>'''Note''':</u>All fields are mandatory.
  
*'''Select '''Submit&nbsp;'''to add the '''Cycle Count Item'''or '''Reset'''to cancel.'''
+
*Select '''SAVE'''&nbsp;to add the Cycle Count Item or '''CANCEL''' to cancel.  
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
'''Figure 35: Add Cycle Count Item'''<br/> ''[[File:Figure 35- Add Cycle Count Item.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;''
  
''''''Figure 76: Add Cycle Count Item'''<br/> [[File:Add Cycle Count Item1.png|RTENOTITLE]]<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;'''
+
&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;
 +
<ol start="2">
 +
<li>
 +
To Edit the Cycle Count:
 +
</li>
 +
</ol>
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;2. To '''Complete the '''Cycle Count:'''
+
*Activate the checkmark next to the SubInventory to be counted.
 +
*Select the Edit button from the toolbar to open the Edit Cycle Count Items sub-page
 +
*Input the data at the Actual Qty text field.
 +
*Select SAVE.
 +
&nbsp; <ol start="3">
 +
<li>
 +
To Submit the Cycle Count:
 +
</li>
 +
</ol>
  
*'''Activate the checkmark next to the Sub Inventory to be counted.'''
+
*Activate the checkmark next to the SubInventory to be counted.  
*'''Double click on the&nbsp;&nbsp;'''Actual Qty'''&nbsp;text field&nbsp;'''
+
*Select the Submit button from the toolbar.  
*'''A new drop-down bar is activated, allowing the user to increase/decrease the quantity ('''see below''').'''
 
*'''Select '''Enter''''''
 
*''''''Message Screen''' prompts the user to '''Save Changes'''.'''
 
*'''Select '''Yes'''.'''
 
  
''''''Figure 76a: Actual Quantity Drop-Down''''''
+
&nbsp;
  
'''[[File:Actual Quantity Drop-Down.png|border|RTENOTITLE]] &nbsp;'''
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut">Edit Plan Items: Adjust In/Out</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
Within the Adjust In/Out sub-page, operators enter the actual quantity of parts being counted/inventoried for the selected Plan Item, or make a quantity adjustment using the&nbsp;Edit Tab.
  
====== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Plan_Items_Sub-Tab:_Adjust_In.2FOut">Edit Plan Items Sub-Tab: Adjust In/Out</span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span> ======
+
'''Figure 36: Adjust In/Out'''
  
'''Within the '''Adjust In/Out''' sub-tab, operators enter the actual quantity of parts being counted/inventoried for the selected '''Plan Item''', or make a quantity adjustment using the&nbsp;'''Edit Tab.''''''
+
[[File:Figure 36- Adjust In Out.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]
  
''''''Figure 77: Adjust In/Out''''''
+
&nbsp;
  
''''''[[File:Edit Plan Item Subtab.png|RTENOTITLE]]''''''
+
#To enter cycle countquantity:  
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
*Select the Location of the parts being counted by highlighting the line of information.
 +
*Choose the '''Edit''' function.
 +
*A pop-up window displays: Edit Adjust In/Out(Figure, below)
 +
*Enter the quantity of the item using the Actual Qtydrop-down menu bar.
 +
*Select '''Save''' to complete or '''Cancel''' to abort.
  
#'''To '''enter cycle count'''quantity:'''  
+
<br/> '''Figure 37: Edit Adjust In/Out'''
  
*'''Select the Location of the parts being counted by highlighting the line of information.'''
+
[[File:Figure 37- Edit Adjust InOut.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]
*'''Choose the '''Edit'''function.'''
 
*'''A pop-up window displays: '''Edit Adjust In/Out'''('''Figure''', '''below''')'''
 
*'''Enter the quantity of the item using the '''Actual Qty'''drop-down menu bar.'''
 
*'''Select '''Save'''to complete or '''Cancel'''to abort.'''
 
  
<br/> ''''''Figure 78: Edit Adjust In/Out''''''
+
'''<u>Note</u>''': Once all inventory is recorded, the new totals are reflected in the list (See Actual Qtyand System Qtylines in Figure, below.)
  
'''[[File:Edit Adjust In Out.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
+
&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;
  
<u>NOTE</u>''': Once all inventory is recorded, the new totals are reflected in the list ('''See Actual Qty'''and '''System Qty'''lines in '''Figure''', below.)'''
+
&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 2. Approve&nbsp;a Cycle Count: This is the most important feature of the Cycle Count submodule. There are several prerequisites that apply:
  
''''''Figure 79: Adjust In and Out''''''
+
*<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9be6-576d-2633-a133c69b0b86">Only users assigned “</span>'''Approver'''” may approve a cycle count. The'''Approve by''' feature in the top menu bar will be deactivated if an unapproved user is working in the system.
 +
*<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9be6-576d-2633-a133c69b0b86">Users may not assign themselves to approve a</span>Cycle Count. (Usually, the operator creates the cycle count and assigns the approver at the same time, selecting his/her supervisor as the approver.
 +
*<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9be6-576d-2633-a133c69b0b86">***Quantities&nbsp;</span><u>must&nbsp;</u>be updated and saved in the Cycle Count Items tab&nbsp;<u>before&nbsp;</u>they are available for approval in the Adjust In/Out Tab. The two steps cannot be completed in the opposite order.
  
''''''[[File:Edit Adjust in and Out.png|RTENOTITLE]]''' &nbsp; &nbsp;'''
+
&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;4.&nbsp;To '''approve''' the Cycle Count Quantity:
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 2. To '''Export '''a Cycle Count List:'''
+
*<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9be8-da11-67ce-bb6057eb7a61">Highlight the&nbsp;</span>Plan Name.
 +
*<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9be8-da11-67ce-bb6057eb7a61">Select the&nbsp;</span>Approve button and choose Enter.  
 +
*<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9be8-da11-67ce-bb6057eb7a61">A success message displays</span>
  
*'''Select the '''Sub Inventory'''&nbsp;by activating the checkmark next to an&nbsp;entry.'''
+
'''<u><span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9beb-6430-f812-3002a377a7d3">Note</span></u>''': Once approved, the approve button will again be deactivated and the Approver’s name will display in the Approve Column.
*'''Select the '''Export'''icon from the top menu bar.'''
 
*'''A list of parts to be counted automatically downloads in .csv form onto the local drive.'''
 
*'''Users may open to save, print, or share as desired.'''
 
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 3. '''Approve&nbsp;'''a Cycle Count: This is the most important feature of the Cycle Count submodule. There are several prerequisites that apply:'''
+
&nbsp;
  
*'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9be6-576d-2633-a133c69b0b86">Only users assigned “</span>'''Approver'''” may approve a cycle count. The '''Approve by'''feature in the top menu bar will be deactivated if an unapproved user is working in the system.'''
+
== Delete Cycle Count ==
*'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9be6-576d-2633-a133c69b0b86">Users may not assign themselves to approve a</span>'''Cycle Count'''. (Usually, the operator creates the cycle count and assigns the approver at the same time, selecting his/her supervisor as the approver.'''
+
&nbsp;
*'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9be6-576d-2633-a133c69b0b86">***Quantities</span>'''''<u>must</u>'''''be updated and saved in the '''Cycle Count Items tab'''''<u>before</u>'''''they are available for approval in the '''Adjust In/Out Tab'''. The two steps cannot be completed in the opposite order.'''  
+
To '''delete''' a cycle count
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; '''&nbsp;'''4.&nbsp;'''To approve'''the Cycle Count Quantity:'''
+
#'''Select''' an entry from the Plan Name list.
 +
#Select '''Delete''' from the top menu bar menu.&nbsp;  
 +
#Select '''YES''' to confirm or '''NO''' to abort.
  
*'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9be8-da11-67ce-bb6057eb7a61">Highlight the</span>'''Plan Name'''.'''
+
= <span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule">Inventory View[[File:Inventory view icon1.png|Inventory view icon.png]]&nbsp;</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> =
*'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9be8-da11-67ce-bb6057eb7a61">Select the</span>'''Approve'''button and choose '''Enter'''.'''
 
*'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9be8-da11-67ce-bb6057eb7a61">A success message displays (see</span>'''Figure, below''').'''
 
  
''''''Figure 80: Approve a Cycle Count''''''
+
Inventory View allows users to conduct inspections of the various part numbers according to the exact location in the plant.
  
'''[[File:Adjust In Out Approve1.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]<br/> <br/> '''Figure 80a:&nbsp; Success Message for Approve Function: Adjust In/Out Tab''''''
+
'''<u>Note</u>''':This submodule is view only,
  
''''''[[File:Approve Success Message1.png|RTENOTITLE]]''''''
+
'''Figure 38: Inventory View Main Menu Bar'''
  
''''''<u><span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9beb-6430-f812-3002a377a7d3">NOTE</span></u>''': Once approved, the approve button will again be deactivated and the Approver’s name will display in the Approve Column (see '''below''').'''
+
'''''''[[File:Figure 38- Inventory View Main Menu Bar.png|border|800px|RTENOTITLE]]'''''''
<div>''''''Figure 81: Approve Column''''''</div> <div>''''''[[File:Approve Lockouts.png|RTENOTITLE]]''''''</div>
 
'''&nbsp; &nbsp;'''
 
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
&nbsp;
  
 +
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View">Search/Filter Inventory View</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Inventory_View_Submodule">Inventory View Submodule&nbsp;</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>''[[File:Inventory View Submodule Icon.png|90px|RTENOTITLE]]'' ===
+
Users may limit their search by choosing from the following filter options:
  
Inventory View allows users to conduct inspections of the various part numbers according to the exact location in the plant.
+
*Sub Inventory: Select the Sub Inventory using the drop-down menu bar.
 +
*Locator: Select the Locator using the drop-down menu bar.
 +
*Part Number: Select the Part Number using the drop-down menu bar.
 +
*Part Name: Enter the Part Name.
 +
*Model: Enter the Model.  
  
'''<u>Note</u>:''' This submodule is view only.'
+
Users may view additional information about the Part Numbers selected, and their status in the manufacturing process.
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
'''Figure 83: Inventory View Main Menu Bar'''
+
#Select the entry from the list by highlighting the desired line of information.
 +
#A toolbar displays on the top portion of the screen, allowing users to view the following additional information associated with the part number selected: Alternative Parts, Return to Vendors
  
''''''[[File:Figure 83- Inventory View Main Menu Bar.png|border|800px|RTENOTITLE]]''''''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab">Alternative Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
Within the Alternative Parts page&nbsp;users may view the following information associated with the part number selected:
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
*Part Number
 +
*Part Name
 +
*Qty
 +
*Qty Uom
 +
*Max Inventory
 +
*Minimum Inventory
 +
*Safe Inventory
  
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Inventory_View">Search/Filter Inventory View</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span> ====
+
== <br/> <span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab">Return to Vendors&nbsp;</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
'''Users may limit their search by choosing from the following filter options:'''
+
Within the Return to Vendors page users may view the following information associated with the part number selected:
  
*''''''Sub Inventory''': Select the Sub Inventory using the drop-down menu bar.'''
+
*RTV#
*''''''Locator''': Select the Locator using the drop-down menu bar.'''
+
*Receive #
*''''''Part Number''': Select the Part Number using the drop-down menu bar.'''
+
*Part Number
*''''''Part Name''': Enter the Part Name.'''
+
*Sub Inventory  
*''''''Model''': Enter the Model.'''
+
*Locator  
 +
*Returned Date
 +
*Returned By
 +
*Returned Qty
 +
*Qty Uom
  
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs">Additional Inventory View Tabs</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span> ====
+
&nbsp;
  
'''Users may view additional information about the Part Numbers selected, and their status in the manufacturing process.'''
 
  
#'''Select the entry from the list by highlighting the desired line of information.'''
 
#'''A window displays on the bottom portion of the screen, allowing users to view the following additional information associated with the part number selected: '''Alternative Parts''', '''Return to Vendors''', and '''PRs'''('''Purchase Requests''').'''
 
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
= <span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts_Submodule">Transfer Parts&nbsp;[[File:CMMS Transfer Parts .png|CMMS Transfer Parts .png]]</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> =
  
''''''Figure 84: Inventory View<br/> [[File:Inventory View.png|border|800px|RTENOTITLE]]'''<br/> &nbsp;'''
+
The Transfer Parts submoduleallows plants to transfer parts between sub-inventories and locations. Within this portal, users may search/filterfor specific parts; addtransfer parts; edittransfer parts; or exporttransfer part information to a local drive.
  
===== <span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Alternative_Parts_Tab">Additional Inventory View Tabs: Alternative Parts Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span> =====
+
'''Figure 39: Transfer Parts Main Menu'''
  
'''Within the '''Alternative Parts Tab'''users may view the following information associated with the part number selected:'''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts">[[File:Figure 39- Transfer Parts Main Menu.png|border|900px|Figure 86- Transfer Parts Main Menu.png]]<br/> <br/> Search/Filter Transfer Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
*''''''Part Number''''''
+
#Users may search for a specific part according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the Transfer Parts Submodule:
*''''''Part Name''''''
 
*''''''Qty''''''
 
*''''''Qty Uom''''''
 
*''''''Max Inventory''''''
 
*''''''Minimum Inventory''''''
 
*''''''Safe Inventory''''''
 
  
===== <br/> <span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab"><span class="mw-headline" id="Additional_Inventory_View_Tabs:_Return_to_Vendors_Tab">Additional Inventory View Tabs: Return to Vendors Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span> =====
+
*Created Date From/Created Date To: Drop-down calendar menus allow users to search for Part Numbers according to the time period they were received in the system.''  
 +
*Part Number: Drop-down menu allows the user to further limit the search according to: AVL PNand MFG PN.Users may also scroll the list provided in the drop-down menu.''
 +
*Status: Drop-down calendar allows the user to choose: Pending, Completed, Cancelled.''  
 +
*From Sub Inventory
 +
*From Location
 +
*To Sub Inventory
 +
*To Location
  
'''Within the&nbsp;'''Return to Vendors Tab'''users may view the following information associated with the part number selected:'''
+
&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;2. Select filtering options.<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;3. Choose the search icon(e.g. magnifying glass).<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;4. Selected information is now in the list below the top menu bar.
  
*''''''RTV#''''''
+
&nbsp;
*''''''Receive #''''''
 
*''''''Part Number''''''
 
*''''''Sub Inventory''''''
 
*''''''Locator''''''
 
*''''''Returned Date''''''
 
*''''''Returned By''''''
 
*''''''Returned Qty''''''
 
*''''''Qty Uom''''''
 
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts">Add Transfer Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
To add a new Transfer Partsentry:
  
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts_Submodule">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transfer_Parts_Submodule">Transfer Parts Submodule</span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span>&nbsp;'''''[[File:Transfer Parts Submodule Icon.png|90px|RTENOTITLE]]''''' ===
+
#Select '''Add''' from the Transfer Partsmenu bar. The Add Transfer Partspop-up menu appears.
 +
#Complete the fields provided. Drop-down menus are available to aid some selections.  
  
<br/> '''The '''Transfer Parts submodule'''allows plants to transfer parts between sub-inventories and locations. Within this portal, users may '''search/filter'''for specific parts; '''add'''transfer parts; '''edit'''transfer parts; or '''export'''transfer part information to a local drive.'''
+
*Part Number
 +
*From Sub Inventory
 +
*From Locator
 +
*To Sub Inventory
 +
*To Locator
 +
*Transfer Qty
 +
*Qty UOM
 +
*Status: Pending, Completed
 +
*Comment&nbsp; &nbsp;''  
  
'''Figure 86: Transfer Parts Main Menu'''
+
&nbsp;​'''<u>Note</u>''': Sub Inventories and Locations are associated with part numbers in the Part List submodule of Spare Parts.&nbsp;<span id="docs-internal-guid-9eade5b4-81e5-cc2e-4c15-d63e5a927d3a">If the desired Sub Inventory or Locator is not available from the drop-down list return to the</span>Part List >Part Number > Edit > Sub Inventory & Locator Tab.
  
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transfer_Parts">[[File:Figure 86- Transfer Parts Main Menu.png|border|900px|Figure 86- Transfer Parts Main Menu.png]]<br/> <br/> Search/Filter Transfer Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span> ====
+
&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;4. Select '''Save''' to finish, or '''Cancel''' to abort.
  
#'''Users may search for a specific part according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the '''Transfer Parts Submodule''':'''  
+
'''Figure 40: Add Transfer Parts'''
  
*''''''Created Date From/Created Date To''': Drop-down calendar menus allow users to search for Part Numbers according to the time period they were received in the system.'''
+
[[File:Figure 40- Add Transfer Parts.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]
*''''''Part Number''': Drop-down menu allows the user to further limit the search according to: '''AVL PN'''and '''MFG PN.'''Users may also scroll the list provided in the drop-down menu.'''
 
*''''''Status''': Drop-down calendar allows the user to choose: '''Pending''', '''Completed''', '''Cancelled'''.'''
 
*''''''From Sub Inventory''''''
 
*''''''From Location''''''
 
*''''''To Sub Inventory''''''
 
*''''''To Location''''''
 
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;2. Select filtering options.<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;3. Choose the '''search icon'''(e.g. magnifying glass).<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;4. Selected information is now in the list below the top menu bar.'''
+
&nbsp;
  
''''''Figure 86a: Transfer Parts List''''''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts">Edit Transfer Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
''''''[[File:Transfer Parts List.png|border|800px|RTENOTITLE]]''''''
+
To edita Transfer Partentry:
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
#Select an entry from the Transfer Partslist.
 +
#Select Edit. The Edit Transfer Partspop-up window appears.
 +
#The following fields are available for edit: Locator; Sub Inventory; and Status.
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
'''<u>Note</u>''''': ''Users may select a different part from the drop-down menu and change sub inventory and locator.
  
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_Transfer_Parts">Add Transfer Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span> ====
+
&nbsp;
  
'''To '''add'''a new '''Transfer Parts'''entry:'''
+
&nbsp;
  
#'''Select '''Add'''from the '''Transfer Parts'''menu bar. The '''Add Transfer Parts'''pop-up menu appears.'''
+
&nbsp;
#'''Complete the fields provided. Drop-down menus are available to aid some selections.'''
 
  
*''''''Part Number''''''
 
*''''''From Sub Inventory''''''
 
*''''''From Locator''''''
 
*''''''To Sub Inventory''''''
 
*''''''To Locator''''''
 
*''''''Transfer Qty''''''
 
*''''''Qty UOM''''''
 
*''''''Status: Pending, Completed''''''
 
*''''''Comment'''&nbsp; &nbsp;'''
 
  
'''&nbsp;​''''''<u>Note</u>''''''''':''' '''Sub Inventories and Locations are associated with part numbers in the [[#Part_List_submodule|Part List submodule]] of Spare Parts.&nbsp;<span id="docs-internal-guid-9eade5b4-81e5-cc2e-4c15-d63e5a927d3a">If the desired Sub Inventory or Locator is not available from the drop-down list return to the </span>'''Part List >''' '''Part Number > Edit > Sub Inventory & Locator Tab.'''
+
= <span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs_Submodule">Transaction Logs&nbsp;[[File:CMMS Transaction Logs .png|CMMS Transaction Logs .png]]&nbsp;</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> =
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;4. Select '''Save'''to finish, or '''Cancel'''to abort.'''
+
The Transaction Log submodule<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bfb-3fa5-45bf-fc537f638381">allows plants to</span>viewthe activity of part numbers actively being moved within the system. All transactions completed inReceive Parts, Return Parts, or Transfer Partsare available. Received parts may be moved within the Transaction Log module. All other transaction types are view only.
  
'''Figure 87: Add Transfer Parts'''
+
'''Figure 58: Transaction Logs Main Menu'''
  
'''[[File:Figure 87- Add Transfer Parts.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
+
[[File:Figure 41- Transaction Logs Main Menu.png|border|900px|Figure 89- Transaction Logs Main Menu.png]]
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs">Search/Filter Transaction Logs</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Transfer_Parts">Edit Transfer Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span> ====
+
#Users may search for part numbers by selecting any of the criteria located on the top menu bar of the Transaction LogsSubmodule:
  
'''To '''edit'''a '''Transfer Part'''entry:'''
+
*Part Number: Drop-down menu allows the user to further limit search: AVL;&nbsp;PN;&nbsp;&nbsp;MFG PN
 +
*Sub Inventory
 +
*Locator
 +
*Transaction Date From/Transaction Date To  
 +
*Transaction Type Drop-down menu allows the user to further limit the search: Receive Parts; Issue Parts; Return Parts; Adjust Parts; Reuse Parts; Sub Inv Transfer  
  
#'''Select an entry from the '''Transfer Parts'''list.'''
+
&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;2. Select filtering options.<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;3. Choose the search icon(e.g. magnifying glass).
#'''Select '''Edit'''. The '''Edit Transfer Parts'''pop-up window appears.'''
 
#'''The following fields are available for edit: '''Locator'''; '''Sub Inventory'''; and '''Status'''.'''
 
  
''''''<u>Note</u>''': Users may select a different part from the drop-down menu and change sub inventory and locator.'''
+
&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;4. The selected entries are now displayed in list form beneath the top menu bar.
  
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Transfer_Parts">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Transfer_Parts"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Transfer_Parts">Export Transfer Parts</span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span> ====
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs">View Transaction Logs</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
'''To '''Export''':'''
+
#To view:  
  
*'''Select the desired information to export to the local drive by activating the checkbox next to the entry.'''
+
*Highlight the data in the list.
*'''Select '''Export''' from '''Transfer Parts''''''
+
*Double click on the highlighted entry.  
*'''The exported file will automatically download onto the local drive-in .csv format.'''  
+
*A text box displays that shows complete transaction details of the selected '''Part Number'''.  
*'''Open the .csv and rename, save, file, or print as desired.'''
 
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
&nbsp;
  
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs_Submodule">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Transaction_Logs_Submodule">Transaction Logs Submodule&nbsp;</span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span>'''[[File:Transaction Logs Submodule Icon.png|90px|RTENOTITLE]]''' ===
+
&nbsp;
  
'''The '''Transaction Log submodule'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bfb-3fa5-45bf-fc537f638381">allows plants to</span>'''view'''the activity of part numbers actively being moved within the system. All transactions completed in'''Receive Parts, Return Parts''', or '''Transfer Parts'''are available. Received parts may be moved within the Transaction Log module. All other transaction types are view only.'''
+
&nbsp;
<div>'''&nbsp;'''</div>
 
'''Figure 89: Transaction Logs Main Menu'''
 
  
'''[[File:Figure 89- Transaction Logs Main Menu.png|border|900px|Figure 89- Transaction Logs Main Menu.png]]'''
+
&nbsp;
  
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Transaction_Logs">Search/Filter Transaction Logs</span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span> ====
 
  
#'''Users may search for part numbers by selecting any of the criteria located on the top menu bar of the '''Transaction Logs'''Submodule:'''
+
= <span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request_Submodule">Purchase Request&nbsp;[[File:CMMS Purchase Request.png|CMMS Purchase Request.png]]</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> =
  
*''''''Part Number''': Drop-down menu allows the user to further limit search: '''AVL''';'''&nbsp;PN''';&nbsp;&nbsp;'''MFG PN''''''
+
Within the Purchase Request submodule, plants build Purchase Requests to order new parts for their equipment. Users may search; create; or edit PRs (Purchase Requests). Multiple screens within this submodule provide a work area for users to record and adjust order details, thus eliminating the need for paper scratch pads.
*''''''Sub Inventory''''''
 
*''''''Locator''''''
 
*''''''Transaction Date From/Transaction Date To''''''
 
*''''''Transaction Type''' Drop-down menu allows the user to further limit the search: '''Receive Parts'''; '''Issue Parts'''; '''Return Parts'''; '''Adjust Parts'''; '''Reuse Parts'''; '''Sub Inv Transfer''''''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;2. Select filtering options.<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;3. Choose the '''search icon'''(e.g. magnifying glass).'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;4. The selected entries are now displayed in list form beneath the top menu bar.'''
 
 
 
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="View_Transaction_Logs">View Transaction Logs</span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span> ====
 
  
#'''To view:'''  
+
'''Figure 42: Procurement Workbench Main Menu'''
  
*'''Highlight the data in the list.'''
+
''''[[File:Figure 42- Purchase Request Main Menu.png|border|900px|Figure 91- Purchase Request Main Menu.png]]''''
*'''Double click on the highlighted entry.'''
 
*'''A text box displays that shows complete transaction details of the selected '''Part Number,&nbsp;'''consisting of two tabs: '''General'''& '''Return Parts'''.'''  
 
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
== <br/> <span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Procurement_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Procurement_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Procurement_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Procurement_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Procurement_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Procurement_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Procurement_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Procurement_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Procurement_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Procurement_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Procurement_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Procurement_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Procurement_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Procurement_Workbench">Search/Filter Procurement Workbench</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
=== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts:_General_Tab_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts:_General_Tab_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts:_General_Tab_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts:_General_Tab_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts:_General_Tab_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Receive_Parts:_General_Tab_2">Edit Receive Parts: General Tab</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ===
+
#Users may search according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the Purchase Request submodule:  
  
'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bfe-da93-9c33-e9e7cfe16f43">The </span>'''General Tab''' displays information about the location of the selected Part Number. This tab is a '''''View Only''''' feature.'''
+
*'''Part Number''': Scroll entries with the available drop-down menu or type the Part Numberin the field.''  
 +
*'''Status''': Drop-down menu limits the search by: New, Approved, Closed, or Canceled.''  
  
''''''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9bfe-da93-9c33-e9e7cfe16f43">Figure 89a: Edit Receive Parts</span>''''''
+
&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 2. Select filtering option(s).<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 3. Choose the search icon(e.g. magnifying glass).
<div>'''[[File:Edit Receive Parts.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''</div> <div>
 
#'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9c02-b57f-13d2-9a9e6aeef063">If the Part Number is in </span>'''Received Status''', users may use the '''Return Parts tab''' to move the Part back into inventory. If the selected Part Number however, has already been returned, this tab is unavailable.'''
 
#'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9c02-b57f-13d2-9a9e6aeef063">Select the </span>'''Return Part Tab'''. The following Window becomes available:'''
 
  
''''''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9c02-b57f-13d2-9a9e6aeef063">Figure 89b: Return Part Tab</span>''''''
+
'''<u>Note</u>''': To move to the next page of part numbers: type a page number in the scroll bar at the bottom of the drop-down menu and select enter on the keyboard.
<div>'''[[File:Edit Receive Parts Menu1.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]'''</div> <div>'''&nbsp;'''</div> <div>
 
#'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9c07-5dfb-c2c3-4aca79feeb11">With the </span>'''Return Part Tab''', Users may '''add''', '''edit''', or '''export''' Parts.'''
 
  
'''<u>'''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9c07-5dfb-c2c3-4aca79feeb11">Note</span>'''</u>: This window provides the same actions as the&nbsp;'''Return Parts''' submodule; all activity completed here will also be reflected in the '''Return Part''' submodule.'''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Create_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Create_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Create_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Create_Purchase_Request">Create Purchase Request</span></span></span></span> ==
  
''''''<u><span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9c07-5dfb-c2c3-4aca79feeb11">Note</span></u>''': Only '''Receive''' parts '''Transaction '''Types can be moved within this submodule'''
+
To Create a Suggested PR Purchase Request:
  
'''&nbsp; '''<span id="docs-internal-guid-8c5e79be-9c07-5dfb-c2c3-4aca79feeb11">Figure 89c: Add Return Parts Window</span>''''''
+
#Select the '''Add'''&nbsp;icon.
<div>'''[[File:Edit Receive Parts Return Parts Tab Add.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''</div> </div> </div>
+
#A message screen displays.&nbsp;
==== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Transaction_Logs"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Transaction_Logs">Export Transaction Logs</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ====
+
#&nbsp;Choose '''Yes''' to create a PR, or '''No''' to cancel the activity.  
 +
#&nbsp;The system assigns a new '''PR Batch#''', and the entry now displays on the list below the main menu.
  
#''''''Export''' any '''Transaction Log''':'''
+
'''<u>Note</u>''': The following information displays in <span style="color:#0000FF">blue text&nbsp;</span>on the top of the menu bar: <span style="color:#0000FF">(Stockable & Status(Active)&Source Type(External)&Reused Flag(False)And Qty(QOH+In Transit Qty) is lower than Safety Stock)</span>.
  
*'''Select the desired Transaction Log by highlighting the line of data in the list.'''
+
#This information details the prerequisites required to create a suggested Purchase Request (PR). Only part numbers that meet the required prerequisites will be accepted as part of a suggested PR. Following is an explanation of each requirement:
*'''Select '''Export''' from '''Transaction Log's main menu'''.'''
 
*'''The exported file will download onto the local drive in .csv format.'''
 
*'''Open the .csv and rename, save, file, or print as desired.'''
 
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
*Stockable: Parts must be marked as “in stock” to be part of a suggested PR''  
 +
*Status(Active): Part Status must be marked “active” to be part of a suggested PR''  
 +
*Source Type (External): Only external parts will be accepted as part of a suggested PR''
 +
*Reused Flag (False): Reused parts are not accepted as part of a suggested PR''
 +
*Qty (QOH+In Transit Qty) is lower than Safety Stock: The part’s quantity on hand combined with the part’s quantity in transit (on the way) must be lower than the part’s safety stock in order to be accepted as part of a suggested PR.''  
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
'''<u>Note</u>''': Part Number properties are managed within the first submodule of Spare Parts (Part List) under the Editfunction.
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Workbench">Edit Workbench</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
 +
To edit:
  
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request_Submodule">'''<span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Purchase_Request_Submodule">Purchase Request Submodule&nbsp;</span></span></span></span></span></span>'''</span>'''[[File:Purchase Request Icon.png|90px|RTENOTITLE]]''' ===
+
#Select an entry from the list by activating the checkbox next to the listing.
 +
#Select the '''Edit''' icon from the top menu bar.
 +
#A new window now displays (Edit Workbench) that provides necessary details and a workspace to build a PR (Purchase Request).  
  
Within the Purchase Request submodule, plants build Purchase Requests to order new parts for their equipment. Users may search; create; or edit PRs (Purchase Requests). Multiple screens within this submodule provide a work area for users to record and adjust order details, thus eliminating the need for paper scratch pads.
+
'''Figure 43: Edit Workbench'''<br/> ''[[File:Figure 43- Edit Purchase Request Workbench.png|border|800px|RTENOTITLE]]''
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
'''Figure 91: Procurement Workbench Main Menu'''
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Purchase_Request">Edit a Purchase Request</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
  
'''[[File:Figure 91- Purchase Request Main Menu.png|border|900px|Figure 91- Purchase Request Main Menu.png]]'''
+
To '''edit''' a Purchase Request:
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
#Select a '''Suggested PR''' from the list by activating the checkmark next to the line of information.
 +
#Select the '''Edit''' icon.
 +
#Selecting Edit populates data into the side panel and also displays a pop-up window (Edit Purchase Request) that allows the user to change the following elements of the PR:
  
=== <br/> '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Procurement_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Procurement_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Procurement_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Procurement_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Procurement_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Search.2FFilter_Procurement_Workbench">Search/Filter Procurement Workbench</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ===
+
*'''Requester''': Select from the drop-down menu''
 +
*'''Department''': (shown in tree format with parent and children departments demarcated)''
 +
*'''Vendor''': (select the vendor from the drop-down menu)''
 +
*'''Urgent''': (activate the checkbox if the change is urgent. Default is not urgent.)''
 +
*'''Status''': Drop-down menu provides choices: New; Approved; Canceled
 +
*'''Comment'''  
  
#'''Users may search according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the '''Purchase Request''' submodule:'''  
+
&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;4. Select '''Save''' to complete, or '''Cancel''' to abort the action.
  
*''''''Part Number''': Scroll entries with the available drop-down menu or type the '''Part Number''' in the field.'''
+
'''Figure 44: Edit Purchase Request'''
*''''''Status''': Drop-down menu limits the search by: '''New''', '''Approved''', '''Closed''', or '''Cancelled'''.'''  
 
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 2. Select filtering option(s).<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 3. Choose the '''search icon''' (e.g. magnifying glass).'''
+
'''[[File:Figure 44- Edit Purchase Request.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]'<br/> &nbsp;''
  
''''''<u>Note</u>''': To move to the next page of part numbers: type a page number in the scroll bar at the bottom of the drop-down menu and select enter on the keyboard.'''
+
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="PR_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="PR_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="PR_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="PR_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="PR_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="PR_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="PR_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="PR_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="PR_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="PR_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="PR_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="PR_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="PR_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="PR_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="PR_Items">PR Items</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
  
'''To '''Create a Suggested PR Purchase Request''':'''
+
The Purchase Request submodule provides a workspace (PR Item) where employees can add, edit, or deletePR items associated with a selected Purchase Request (see Figure, below).
  
#'''Select the '''Add&nbsp;'''icon.'''  
+
For reference purposes, the bottom portion of the screen displays additional information associated with the selected Purchase Request to include: Alternative Parts, Return to Vendor, PRs, and AVLs.<br/> '''<u>Note</u>''': Fields in the bottom portion of the screen are view only.
#'''A message screen displays. (see '''figure, below''')'''
 
  
''''''Figure 92: Create PR Message''''''
+
'''Figure 45: PR Items available for Edit and View'''
  
''''''[[File:Create New PR Message.png|RTENOTITLE]]''''''
+
[[File:Figure 45- PR Items available for Edit and View.png|border|800px|RTENOTITLE]]<br/> &nbsp;
  
''''''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;'''&nbsp;3. Choose '''Yes''' to create a PR, or '''No''' to cancel the activity.<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 4. The system assigns a new PR#, and the entry now displays on the list below the main menu.'''
+
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_PR_Items_to_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_PR_Items_to_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_PR_Items_to_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_PR_Items_to_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_PR_Items_to_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_PR_Items_to_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_PR_Items_to_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_PR_Items_to_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_PR_Items_to_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_PR_Items_to_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_PR_Items_to_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_PR_Items_to_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_PR_Items_to_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_PR_Items_to_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_PR_Items_to_a_Purchase_Request">Add PR Items to a Purchase Request</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ====
  
''''''Figure 93: Create Suggested PRs''''''
+
To build a Purchase Request:
  
'''[[File:Figure 93- Create Suggested PRs.png|border|900px|Figure 93- Create Suggested PRs.png]]<br/> &nbsp;'''
+
#Select the Purchase Requestfrom the left-hand side of the Edit Workbenchpage by activating the checkbox next to its listing.
 +
#Select the '''Add''' icon from the PR Item screenon the right-hand side of the Edit Workbenchpage.  
 +
#A pop-up window displays: Add PR Item
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
'''Figure 46: Add PR Item Pop-up Window'''
  
''''''<u>Note</u>''': The following information displays in <span style="color:#0000FF">blue text&nbsp;</span>on the top of the menu bar: <span style="color:#0000FF">(Stockable & Status(Active)&Source Type(External)&Reused Flag(False)And Qty(QOH+In Transit Qty) is lower than Safety Stock)</span>.'''
+
'''[[File:Figure 46- Add PR Item Pop-up Window.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]'<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;''
  
#'''This information details the prerequisites required to create a suggested Purchase Request (PR). Only part numbers that meet the required prerequisites will be accepted as part of a suggested PR. Following is an explanation of each requirement:'''
+
&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;4. Select the Part Numberfrom the provided drop-down menu bar.<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;5. A table below the part number&nbsp;automatically populatesbased on the Part Number selection.<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;6. The following data&nbsp;is available for reference/viewonly:
  
*''''''Stockable''': Parts must be marked as “in stock” to be part of a suggested PR'''
+
*'''Vendor'''  
*''''''Status''': Part Status must be marked “active” to be part of a suggested PR'''  
+
*'''Currency'''  
*''''''Source Type (External)''': Only external parts will be accepted as part of a suggested PR'''  
+
*'''Current Price'''  
*''''''Reused Flag (False)''': Reused parts are not accepted as part of a suggested PR'''  
+
*'''Lead Time'''  
*''''''Qty (QOH+In Transit Qty) is lower than Safety Stock''': The part’s quantity on hand combined with the part’s quantity in transit (on the way) must be lower than the part’s safety stock in order to be accepted as part of a suggested PR.'''  
 
  
''''''<u>Note</u>''': Part Number properties are managed within the first submodule of Spare Parts ('''[[#Part_List_Submodule|Part List]]''') under the '''Edit''' function.'''
+
&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;7. Complete the '''Order Qty''': Select the quantity of parts to order with the drop-down menu barprovided.<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;8. Select Delivery Date: Select the delivery date with the drop-down calendarprovided. <u>NOTE</u>: A delivery date is automatically populatedbased on Part Number availability; however, users may change delivery date as needed.<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;9. Select Saveto add the Part number to the selected Purchase Request or Cancelto abort the action.<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;10. Added Part Numbers display in list format within the PR Itemworkspace.<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;11. On the bottom portionof the Edit Workbench page, reference information pertaining to the PR Item selected is available for reference. To activate the information, select the PR item by activating the checkmark next to the data entry. Corresponding information in the bottom field will display. The screens are view-only; users may not editthis field. The following information is available:
  
=== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Workbench"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_Workbench">Edit Workbench</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' ===
+
*Alternative parts
 +
*Return to Vendors
 +
*PRs
 +
*AVLs
  
'''To '''edit''':'''
+
'''<u>Note</u>''': Some fields will be empty, based on Part Number selected.
  
#'''Select an entry from the list by activating the checkbox next to the listing.'''
+
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item">Edit a PR Item</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ====
#'''Select the '''Edit''' icon from the top menu bar.'''
 
#'''A new window now displays ('''Edit Workbench''') that provides necessary details and a workspace to build a '''PR (Purchase Request)'''.'''
 
  
''''''Figure 94: Edit Workbench'''<br/> [[File:Edit Workbench.png|border|800px|RTENOTITLE]]'''
+
<br/> To&nbsp;'''Edit''' a PR Item:
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
#Select the Purchase Request Item by activating the checkbox next to the line of data.
 +
#Select the '''Edit''' icon.
 +
#The Edit PR Itempop-up window displays the same fields as the Add function.
 +
#The following fields are available for edit: Order Qty; Delivery Date
 +
#Choose Saveto complete the change, or Cancelto discard the action.
 +
#Similar to the Add PR Itemwindow, the following information associated with the Part Number is available for referencein a view onlyformat: Vendor; Currency; Current Price; Lead Time
  
===== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Purchase_Request">Edit a Purchase Request</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' =====
+
==== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item">Delete a PR Item</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ====
  
'''To '''edit''' a Purchase Request:'''
+
To '''Delete''' a PR Item:
  
#'''Select a '''Suggested PR''' from the list by activating the checkmark next to the line of information.'''
+
#Select the Purchase Request Item by activating the checkbox next to the line of data.  
#'''Select the '''Edit''' icon.'''
+
#Select the '''Delete''' icon.  
#'''Selecting '''Edit''' populates data into the side panel and also displays a pop-up window ('''Edit Purchase Request''') that allows the user to change the following elements of the PR:'''
+
#The PR Item will be removed, and no longer display in the PR Item list.
  
*''''''Requester''': Select from the drop-down menu'''
+
==== View Alternative Parts Return to Vendors and AVLS ====
*''''''Department''': (shown in tree format with parent and children departments demarcated)'''
 
*''''''Vendor''': (select the vendor from the drop-down menu)'''
 
*''''''Urgent Status''': (activate the checkbox if the change is urgent. Default is not urgent.)'''
 
*''''''Status''': Drop-down menu provides choices: '''New'''; '''Approved'''; '''Cancelled''''''
 
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;4. Select '''Save''' to complete, or '''Cancel''' to abort the action.'''
+
On the bottom portion of the Edit Workbench page, reference information pertaining to the PR Item selected is available for reference. To activate the information, select the PR item by activating the checkmark next to the data entry. Corresponding information in the bottom field will display. The screens are view only; users may not edit this field. The following information is available:
  
''''''Figure 95: Edit Purchase Request''''''
+
*Alternative parts
 +
*Return to Vendors
 +
*AVLs
  
''''''[[File:Edit Purchase Request.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''<br/> &nbsp;'''
+
&nbsp;
  
===== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="PR_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="PR_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="PR_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="PR_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="PR_Items"><span class="mw-headline" id="PR_Items">PR Items</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' =====
+
&nbsp;
  
'''The Purchase Request submodule provides a workspace ('''PR Item''') where employees can '''add''', '''edit''', or '''delete''' PR items associated with a selected Purchase Request (see '''Figure''', '''below''').'''
+
= <span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Category_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Category_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Category_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Category_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Category_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Category_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Category_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Category_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Category_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Category_Submodule">Part Category[[File:Part Category icon1.png|Part category icon.png]]&nbsp;&nbsp;</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> =
  
'''For reference purposes, the bottom portion of the screen displays additional information associated with the selected Purchase Request to include: '''Alternative Parts''', '''Return to Vendor''', '''PRs''', and '''AVLs'''.<br/> <u>'''NOTE'''</u>: Fields in the bottom portion of the screen are view only.'''
+
The Part Category submodule assists administrators in organizing their assets’ spare parts. Once parent categories are defined, users can quickly move, count, and purchase multiple parts. Users can link multiple categories to individual spare parts from the Part List submodule/Part Category Tab.
  
''''''Figure 96: PR Items available for Edit and View''''''
+
&nbsp;
  
'''[[File:PR Items available for Edit and View.png|border|800px|RTENOTITLE]]<br/> &nbsp;'''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Available_Features"><span class="mw-headline" id="Available_Features"><span class="mw-headline" id="Available_Features"><span class="mw-headline" id="Available_Features"><span class="mw-headline" id="Available_Features"><span class="mw-headline" id="Available_Features"><span class="mw-headline" id="Available_Features"><span class="mw-headline" id="Available_Features"><span class="mw-headline" id="Available_Features"><span class="mw-headline" id="Available_Features"><span class="mw-headline" id="Available_Features"><span class="mw-headline" id="Available_Features"><span class="mw-headline" id="Available_Features"><span class="mw-headline" id="Available_Features">Available Features</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
===== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Add_PR_Items_to_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_PR_Items_to_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_PR_Items_to_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_PR_Items_to_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_PR_Items_to_a_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_PR_Items_to_a_Purchase_Request">Add PR Items to a Purchase Request</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' =====
+
Users may '''Add''', '''Edit''', or '''Activate/Deactivate''' a Part Category within this submodule.
  
'''To '''build a Purchase Request''':'''
+
&nbsp;
  
#'''Select the '''Purchase Request''' from the left-hand side of the '''Edit Workbench''' page by activating the checkbox next to its listing.'''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_A_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_A_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_A_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_A_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_A_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_A_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_A_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_A_Part_Category.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_A_Part_Category.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_A_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_A_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_A_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_A_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_A_Part_Category_2">Add A Part Category</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
#'''Select the '''Add icon''' from the '''PR Item screen''' on the right-hand side of the '''Edit Workbench''' page.'''
 
#'''A pop-up window displays: '''Add PR Item''''''
 
  
''''''Figure 97: Add PR Item Pop-up Window''''''
+
#Select '''Add'''  
 +
#'The Add Spare Part CategoryForm displays. The following fields are available:
  
''''''[[File:Add PR Item.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;'''
+
*<span style="color:#FF0000;">*</span>Category:(Mandatory) Add the parent name of the Spare Part Category. (e.g. ICT Parts, Belts, Fixture Parts, Fuji Parts)
 +
*Description:' (Optional) Add a brief description of the Spare Part Category.
 +
*<span style="color:#FF0000;">*</span>Active:(Mandatory) Check the box to mark the Category as active. The default value is checked (Active). Active fields are denoted by a blue checkmark; inactive fields are denoted by a grey checkmark.&nbsp;  
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;4. Select the '''Part Number''' from the provided drop-down menu bar.<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;5. A table below the part number&nbsp;'''automatically populates''' based on the Part Number selection.<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;6. The following data&nbsp;is available '''for reference/view''' only:'''
+
'''Figure 47: Add Spare Part Category'''
  
*''''''Vendor''''''
+
[[File:Figure 47- Add Spare Part Category.png|border|RTENOTITLE]]
*''''''Currency''''''
 
*''''''Current Price''''''
 
*''''''Lead Time''''''
 
  
'''&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;7. Complete the '''Order Qty''': Select the quantity of parts to order with the '''drop-down menu bar''' provided.<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;8. Select '''Delivery Date''': Select the delivery date with the '''drop-down calendar''' provided. <u>'''NOTE'''</u>: A delivery date is '''automatically populated''' based on Part Number availability; however, users may change delivery date as needed.<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;9. Select '''Save''' to add the Part number to the selected Purchase Request or '''Cancel''' to abort the action.<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;10. Added Part Numbers display in list format within the '''PR Item''' workspace.<br/> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;11. On the '''bottom portion''' of the Edit Workbench page, reference information pertaining to the PR Item selected is available for reference. To activate the information, select the PR item by activating the checkmark next to the data entry. Corresponding information in the bottom field will display. The screens are '''view-only'''; users '''may not edit''' this field. The following information is available:'''
+
&nbsp;
 
 
*''''''Alternative parts''''''
 
*''''''Return to Vendors''''''
 
*''''''PRs''''''
 
*''''''AVLs''''''
 
 
 
'''<u>'''Note'''</u>: Some fields will be empty, based on Part Number selected.'''
 
  
===== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_PR_Item">Edit a PR Item</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' =====
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Part_Category">Edit a Part Category</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
  
<br/> '''To&nbsp;'''Edit''' a PR Item:'''
+
#Select any Part Category by highlighting the entry in the Part Categorylist.  
 
+
#Select '''Edit'''.  
#'''Select the Purchase Request Item by activating the checkbox next to the line of data.'''
+
#Any of the fields can be modified.  
#'''Select the '''Edit''' icon.'''
 
#'''The '''Edit PR Item''' pop-up window displays the same fields as the Add function.'''
 
#'''The following fields are available for edit: '''Order Qty'''; '''Delivery Date''''''
 
#'''Choose '''Save''' to complete the change, or '''Cancel''' to discard the action.'''
 
#'''Similar to the '''Add PR Item''' window, the following information associated with the Part Number is available for '''reference''' in a '''view only''' format: '''Vendor'''; '''Currency'''; '''Current Price'''; '''Lead Time''''''
 
 
 
'''To '''Delete''' a PR Item:'''
 
 
 
#'''Select the Purchase Request Item by activating the checkbox next to the line of data.'''
 
#'''Select the '''Delete''' icon.'''
 
#'''The PR Item will be removed, and no longer display in the PR Item list.'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
 
 
===== '''<span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Purchase_Request"><span class="mw-headline" id="Export_Purchase_Request">Export Purchase Request</span></span></span></span></span></span>''' =====
 
 
 
'''Users may '''export''' the details of a purchase request in a .csv format.<br/> To '''Export''':'''
 
 
 
#'''Select the '''Purchase Request''' (located on the left-hand side of the Edit Workbench page) by activating the checkbox next to the line of data.'''
 
#'''Select the '''Export''' icon.'''
 
#'''The system automatically downloads information in a .csv file onto the user’s local drive.'''
 
#'''Users may rename, save, share, or print the .csv file as desired.'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
 
 
 
 
= <span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Category_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Category_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Category_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Category_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Category_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Category_Submodule"><span class="mw-headline" id="Part_Category_Submodule">Part Category Submodule&nbsp;</span></span></span></span></span></span></span>[[File:Part Category Icon.png|90px|RTENOTITLE]] =
 
 
 
The Part Category submodule assists administrators in organizing their assets’ spare parts. Once parent categories are defined, users can quickly move, count, and purchase multiple parts. Users can link multiple categories to individual spare parts from the Part List submodule/Part Category Tab.
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
 
 
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Available_Features"><span class="mw-headline" id="Available_Features"><span class="mw-headline" id="Available_Features"><span class="mw-headline" id="Available_Features"><span class="mw-headline" id="Available_Features"><span class="mw-headline" id="Available_Features"><span class="mw-headline" id="Available_Features">Available Features</span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
 
 
 
'''Users may '''Add''', '''Edit''', or '''Enable/Disable'''a Part Category within this submodule.'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
 
 
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Add_A_Part_Category.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_A_Part_Category.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B.E2.80.8B"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_A_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_A_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_A_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_A_Part_Category_2"><span class="mw-headline" id="Add_A_Part_Category_2">Add A Part Category</span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
 
 
 
#'''Select '''Add
 
#'''The '''Add Spare Part Category'''Form displays. The following fields are available:'''​​​​​​​
 
 
 
*<span style="color:#FF0000;">*</span>'''Category:''' (Mandatory) Add the parent name of the Spare Part Category. (e.g. ICT Parts, Belts, Fixture Parts, Fuji Parts)
 
*'''Description:''' (Optional) Add a brief description of the Spare Part Category.
 
*<span style="color:#FF0000;">*</span>'''Active:''' (Mandatory) Check the box to mark the Category as active. The default value is checked (Active). Active fields are denoted by a blue checkmark; inactive fields are denoted by a grey checkmark.  
 
  
 
&nbsp;
 
&nbsp;
  
'''Figure 99: Add Spare Part Category'''
+
== <span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Part_Category">Activate/Deactivate&nbsp;a Part Category</span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ==
 
 
'''[[File:Add Spare Part Category.png|RTENOTITLE]]'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
 
 
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Edit_a_Part_Category">Edit a Part Category</span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
 
 
 
#'''Select any Part Category by highlighting the entry in the '''Part Category'''list.'''
 
#'''Select '''Edit'''.'''
 
#'''Any of the fields can be modified.'''
 
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 
 
 
=== <span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Part_Category"><span class="mw-headline" id="Enable.2FDisable_a_Part_Category">Enable/Disable a Part Category</span></span></span></span></span></span></span> ===
 
  
 
Users may change the status of any part category from active to inactive or inactive to active.
 
Users may change the status of any part category from active to inactive or inactive to active.
  
#'''Select the Part Category by highlighting the entry in the Part Category list.'''
+
#Select the Part Category by highlighting the entry in the Part Category list.  
#'''Select '''Enable/Disable'''.'''
+
#Select '''Activate/Deactivate'''.  
#'''The '''Active'''status reflects the change.'''
+
#The Active status reflects the change.  
  
'''&nbsp;'''
+
&nbsp;
  
----
+
&nbsp;
 
 
'''&nbsp;'''
 

Latest revision as of 05:41, 16 October 2024

42Q Home > Production > CMMS > Spare Parts
 

 


 

 

CMMS
Spare Parts
Version MES15.82
Revision E1
 
 

 

 

 

Contents

Spare Parts

The Spare Parts portal of CMMS provides a comprehensive tracking system to manage the parts needed to maintain a plant’s assets. Administrators and operators receive, issue, and return parts; maintain warehouse stock; create purchase orders; and manage vendor information.

To navigate: Production > CMMS > Spare Parts


Spare Parts Submodule Icons

User-friendly icons help users navigate through the Spare Parts portal.

Figure 1: Spare Parts Main Page

RTENOTITLE

 

 


Part List  Part list Icon.png

Within the Part List submodule, users can view all parts pertaining to site equipment and machinery, and perform functions related to those parts.

1. Users can complete the following actions in the Part List submodule:

  • Search/Filter part entries
  • Add/Bulk Upload parts
  • Edit parts
  • Export parts

Note: Abbreviations located within this module are defined as follows:

  • QOH: Quantity on Hand
  • QIT: Quantity in Transit
  • Qty UOM: Quantity Unit of Measure: UOMs enable plants to quantify and track inventory items according to their packaging. For example, singular parts are listed as EA (each), while parts that remain packaged together are noted as PAK


Search/Filter Part List

1. Users may search for specific parts according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the Part List Submodule:

  • Part Number: Enter a partial or complete Part Number.
  • Part Name: Enter a partial or complete Part Name.
  • Manufacturer: Select a Manufacturer from the drop-down list.
  • Model: Search for a specific Model.
  • Active: Search by Active or Inactive or all Part Numbers.
  • Project: Search by Project associated with the product the Asset builds. Projects are defined in CMMS Admin > Project.

2. Select filtering options.

3. Select the search icon (e.g. magnifying glass).

Figure 2: Part List Screen

Figure 4 Part List Filtering Options.png

 

3. The figure above shows a typical part list and its subsequent categories.
Note: The Column "AVL's" (Available Vendor List) is highlighted. In an effort to keep costs low, plants are encouraged to monitor warehouse inventory. Because plants can easily purchase necessary parts from Approved Vendors it is advisable to maintain an updated and complete list of multiple vendors in case of unexpected problems. Red cells indicate that only one vendor is available. Yellow cells indicate 2 vendors, and Green cells indicate 3 or more. Because this information is critical to busy plant administrators, it is highlighted for easy reference.

 

Add a Part

To add a part to the Part List:

1. Select Add from the Part List menu. The Add a New Part Number pop-up window displays.

Figure 3: Add a New Part Number Window

Figure 3- Add Parts.png

 

Complete the following fields. Fields noted with a red asterisk * are Mandatory.

  • *Enter a Part Number.
  • Upload Part Image Part Images allow employees to quickly identify parts for part replacment and quick identification at the warehouse level.
  • *Enter a Part Name.
  • *Enter a Manufacturer. Note: This field lists all available companies in a drop-down menu format. To add, edit, or delete a company from this list, return to the Spare Parts main screen and select the Company Submodule submodule (Shop Floor > Configuration >CMMS - Admin > Company).
  • Enter Model: The unique name or number for the specific part, provided by the manufacturer.
  • Enter Unit Weight: A numeric value that corresponds with Unit weight UOM. Drop-down menu provided.
  • Enter Unit Weight UOM: Select the unit of measure for the PN's Unit Weight from the drop-down menu.
  • Options include:
  • Undefined
  • LB
  • G
  • KG
  • Enter Project associated with the Asset’s production.
  • *Enter MFG PN. This field denotes the part number - that is, the part ID for the manufacturer.
  • Enter the Default Sub Inventory: This field allows users to identify one Sub Inventory as the primary location within the Locator for the PN.
  • *Enter Max Inventory. This field denotes the maximum inventory. Max value should be higher or equal than minimum and minimum should be higher or equal than safe.
  • Enter the Default Locator: This field allows users to identify one Locator as the primary physical location for the PN.
  • *Enter Min Inventory. This field denotes the minimum inventory.
  • *Enter Safety Stock: Safe inventory (safety stock) must be less than the value entered in minimum inventory .
  • Enter QTY UOM from the drop-down list. This field denotes the unit of measure for the part, according to how the part is packaged and counted. Options configured for this instance include: Undefined; EA; Meter; PKT; ST; PAK. 

Note: Plants defineQTY UOM (Quantity Unit of Measure) based on their unique parts inventory. The following figure shows possible QTY UOM (Quantity Unit of Measure) examples.

  • Enter Part Type from the drop-down list. Select whether the part is "Easy-expendable" or "None-easy-expendable." Default is Easy-expendable. See Glossary of Terms for further explanation of these terms.
  • Select Source Type from the drop-down list. Options include: Internal or External. Default value is External.
  • Check whether part number is In Stock
  • Check if Reused/Refurbished.
  • Check if Active.
  • Enter a Description. 

Bulk Upload Parts

With the Bulk Upload spare parts function, users can import(create/add) many parts at one time. This function involves downloading the template file, uploading the file and validating whether the data is valid. Users can download the invalid records to check and correct.

  1. Select the BULK UPLOAD , the Bulk Upload window pop-up.


Figure 4: Bulk Upload Spare Parts

Figure 4- Bulk Upload Spare Parts.png

 

  1. Select the here(blue link) to download the .csv template file and fill your parts list records if you do not have the template file.
  2. Drag and drop or select browse(blue link) to open your file.
  3. Select VALIDATE RECORDS, the UPLOAD button will show if the validation process passed.
  4. Select Upload to save the spare parts records to the CMMS system.
  5. Select Download invalid records to download and check the invalid records if some records are invalid.

 

Add Part List: Alternative Parts Tab

Under the Alternative Parts tab, users can add or delete alternative parts. The main purpose of this feature is to associate parts with alternative part choices. NOTE: These actions refer to the selection of fungible parts.

Add Alternative Parts
  1. Select Add from the Alternative Parts menu. The Add Alternative Part pop-up window appears (see Figure, below).
  2. Type a part number in the search bar or select an item from the list.
  3. Select Save to finish or Cancel to abort.

Figure 5: Add a New Alternative Part

RTENOTITLE

 

Delete Alternative Parts

  1. Select an alternative part from the list.
  2. Select delete from the Alternative Part menu. This removes the selected alternative part from the list.

 

Add Part List: AVL (Approved Vendor List)

Under the AVL (Approved Vendor List) tab, users may add, edit, or delete approved vendor information.

Figure 6: AVL (Approved Vendor List) Tab Functions

RTENOTITLE

Add an AVL (Approved Vendor List)

1. Select Add from the menu. The Add pop-up window displays.
2. Complete the fields provided:

  • Select a Company from the drop-down list.
  • Enter an AVL PN (Approved Vendor List Part Number).
  • Enter a Lead Time. Note: Lead Time refers to the delivery time (in days) of the given part.
  • Select Currency from the drop-down list (according to country)
  • Enter Currency Price.
  • Enter a Previous Price.
  • Check to Approve.
  • Enter a Remark.

3. Select Save to finish or Cancel to abort.

Figure 7: Add an AVL (Approved Vendor List)

RTENOTITLE

 

Edit an AVL (approved Vendor List)


1. To edit an AVL (Approved Vendor List), select an AVL from the list and choose Edit. The Edit pop-up menu appears.
2. The user may edit any of the fields provided:

  • Company
  • AVL (Approved Vendor List) PN
  • Lead Time (Day)
  • Currency
  • Current Price
  • Previous Price
  • Approve
  • Remark

3. Select Save to finish or Cancel to abort.

Delete an AVL (Approved Vendor List)

1. To delete an AVL, select an AVL from the list and choose Delete. This removes the AVL from the list.

 

 

Add Part List: Subinventory & Locator Tab

Within the Subinventory & Locator Tab, users can specify the exact location of the Spare Part being catalogued into the system. There are three functions available in the Subinventory & Locator Tab

 

Add Sub Inventory & Locator

  1. Search by Sub Inventory or utilize the drop-down feature
  2. Search by Locator.
  3. Scroll through the list provided to select Sub Inventory & Locator
  4. Select the Search icon (magnifying glass).
  5. Select Save.
  6. Each Sub Inventory & Locator pair must be added and saved one at a time.
  7. Please Note that locations must be selected as pairs. Users cannot select a Locator individually; nor can they select a Sub Inventory individually.

 

Figure 8: Subinventory & Locator Tab

RTENOTITLE

 

 

Add Sub Inventory

To add an individual Sub Inventory without a Locator:

  1. Select Add Sub Inventory.
  2. Check the Sub Inventory of choice from the list.
  3. Save.

Figure 9: Add New Sub Inventory

RTENOTITLE

 

Part List: Add Part Category Tab

Users can add the PN to one or multiple Part Categories. This option allows plants to efficiently apply changes to  multiple parts in the same category based on the asset the spare part belongs to.

Figure 10: Add Part Category Tab

Figure 10- Add Part Category Tab.png

There are 2 functions available in the Add Part Category Tab:

 

Add a Part Category

 

  1. Select Add.
  2. Select  the Part Category entry line from the list provided by activating the checkmark.
  3. Select Save.

Figure 11: Add Part Categories to PN

RTENOTITLE

 

 

 

Delete a Part Category

  1. Check the Part Category to be removed from the PN.
  2. Select Delete.

 

Edit Part List

Users can modify any of the part properties from the Part List sub-module page. To edit a part:

  1. Select a part from the list. The Edit function becomes available.
  2. Select Edit. The Edit Part pop-up window appears.

 

Figure 6: Edit a Part

Edit a Part General Tab.png

  1. Users may edit the fields for the selected part.

Note: The fields mirror those populated in the Add Part List

Part Properties: Alternative Parts 

Under the Alternative Parts page, users can add and delete alternative parts assigned to a given part.

Add an Alternative Part

1. Select Add from the Alternative Parts menu.
2. Type the Part number in the text provided and select the search icon (e.g. magnifying glass); or scroll the list to select the alternative part number.
3. Select the Add icon to complete.

4. At the Add Alternative Part page, select one or more Part numbers from the list, then Select SAVE.

Delete an Alternative Part

1. Select a part from the Alternative Parts list. The Delete function becomes available.
2. Select Delete to remove the part from the list.


Figure 7: Alternative Parts

Figure 16- Alternative Parts Tab.png

 

Part Properties: AVL (Approved Vendor List) 

Within the AVL page, users can add, edit, and approve available part numbers (AVLs) for the selected part.

 

Add an AVL (Approved Vendor List):

1. Select Add from the AVL menu. The Add pop-up window appears.  

2. Complete the information for the fields provided:

  • Select a Company Name from the drop-down list.
  • Enter Lead Time.
  • Select Currency according to country from the drop-down list.
  • Enter Current Price.
  • Enter Previous Price.
  • Check if Approved.
  • Enter a Remark about the AVL.
  • Select Save to finish; or Cancel to abort.

Figure 8: Add an AVL(Approved Vendor List)

Figure 8- Add an AVL.png

Edit an AVL (Approved Vendor List):

  1. Select an AVL from the list. The Edit function activates.
  2. Select Edit. The Edit pop-up window displays.
  3. Edit any of the provided fields as needed.
  4. Select Save to finish or Cancel to abort.

Approve an AVL (Approved Vendor List):

  1. Select an AVL from the list. The Approve function activates, as noted by a blue checkmark.
  2. Select Approve to approve the AVL for the selected part.
  3. Note: If the AVL was already approved, this action will render the AVL as unapproved. Approved AVLs are denoted with a blue checkmark under the AVL list; unapproved AVLs are denoted with a grey checkmark.

 Figure 9: Approve AVL

Figure 14- Approve AVL.png

Reject an AVL (Approved Vendor List):

  1. Select an AVL from the list. The Approve function activates, as noted by a blue checkmark.
  2. Select Reject to approve the AVL for the selected part.

Part Properties: Sub Inventory & Locator

A sub inventory is a location where parts are stored (e.g., a warehouse). Locators are the shelf ID within a sub inventory. Plants may opt to omit the locator in the description. Plants often make this choice in situations where there are so many of a given part that plant operators do not need a shelf ID to locate the part. In such cases, only the sub inventory field is selected.
Within this tab, users can add a sub inventory and/or locator.
 

Figure 10: Sub Inventory & Locator Tab

Figure 19- Sub Inventory & Locator Tab.png

   

Add a Sub Inventory and Locator 

  1. Select Add Sub Inventory & Locator from the menu. This opens the Add New Sub Inventory & Locator pop-up window.
  2. Select one or more items to add.
  3. Select Save to finish or Cancel to abort.

Figure 11: Add New Sub Inventory and Locator

RTENOTITLE

 

Add a Sub Inventory

Users may also add a sub inventory (without a locator). To add an individual sub inventory to the PN selected:

  1. Select Add a Sub Inventory.
  2. Select the desired sub inventory from the drop-down list provided.
  3. The new sub inventory will populate on the screen.

Delete a Sub Inventory

Users may also delete a sub inventory (without a locator). To delete an individual sub inventory to the PN selected:

  1. Select the desired sub inventory from the drop-down list provided.
  2. Select the Delete button from the toolbar provided.

Part Properties: Asset Type

Under the Asset Type page, users can add and delete asset types assigned to a part number.

Add an Asset Type

  1. Select Add from the menu tab.
  2. Select the asset type from the list that populates in the pop-up window.

Figure 12: Add Asset Type

Figure 21- Add Asset Type.png

Delete an Asset Type 

  1. Select the asset type by activating the checkbox next to its name.
  2. Select Delete.
  3. The asset type is now removed from the given part.  

Part Properties: Part Categories

Users can Add or Delete Part Categories from the Part Categories Tab while editing a specific Part.

 

Add Part Categories

  1. Select Add from the menu tab.
  2. Select the part category from the list that populates in the pop-up window.  

Figure 13: Add Part Category in Edit Part List

RTENOTITLE

   

Delete a Part Category 

  1. Select the part category by activating the checkbox next to its name.
  2. Select Delete.
  3. The part category is now removed from the given part. 

 

 

 

Receive PartsReceive parts icon.png 

Within the Receive Parts submodule users receive deliveries and increase cycle counts.

Within Receive Parts, users can search/filter the part listing; add received parts; edit received parts, and export received part information.

Figure 14: Receive Parts Filtering Option

Figure 32- Receive Parts Filtering Option.png

 

Search/Filter Receive Parts

Users may search according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the Receive Parts Submodule:

  • Receive #: This number is assigned to the part upon receipt in the warehouse. Enter the Receive# in the text box or scan the Receive# from the bar code.
  • Part Number: Enter the Part Number in the text box. More Part Number search options are available by selecting the Part Number drop-down menu. 
  • Received Date: Enter the time span during which the part was received in the set of calendar drop-downs.
  • Received Date To: Enter the end time span during which the part was received in the set of calendar drop-downs. 
  • Status: Enter the part number status; users may choose from Pending, Completed, or Cancelled.
  • Subinventory: Enter the sub inventory where the part number is located. Users may scroll through sub inventories using the drop-down menu provided.
  • PO #: Enter the Purchase Order#
  • Created By: Users may search for received parts according to the employee who received them. Enter an employee ID.

 Note: Individual company naming conventions apply (e.g.: george_lee; george.lee; George.Lee).

 

Add Receive Parts

 

Figure 15: Add Receive Parts Pop-up Window

RTENOTITLE


To add received parts:
1.From theReceive Parts sub-module page, selectADD EVEIVE PARTS. The Add Receive Parts pop-up menu displays.
2. Complete the fields provided:'

  • Part Number: (Mandatory) A drop-down screen displays; users can search by: Part Number, MFG Part Number, QOH or AVL MFG.
  • Sub Inventory: (Mandatory) Scroll bar allows users to search lists.
  • Source Type: (Mandatory) Note: Select Internal, External., or WR. Internal denotes inside the company; external denotes outside the company.
  • Locator: (Mandatory) Users can scroll lists using the provided drop-down scroll bar.
  • Customs: When External is selected, the Customs field is available. Enter the Customs #.
  • Customs Date: Select the Customs Date with the drop-down calendar.
  • Currency: Only required if the Source Type is External.
  • Vendor: Enter specific vendor information into the text field or select the green All Vendors icon to scroll the complete vendor list.
  • Unit Cost: Only required if the Source Type is External.
  • Issue #: Denotes the recorded ID# when the goods are shipped from the warehouse (this list can be accessed in the Issue Parts submodule).

Note: If a PO# is selected, an Issue# is not needed.

  • PO #: denotes the Purchase Order number.
  • PR #: denotes the Purchase Request number.
  • RTV #: denotes the Return to Vendor number.

Note: Issue #, PO #, and RTV # cannot all be blank. At least one must be populated.

  • Status:(Mandatory) Choose Pending or Completed.
  • Qty UOM: Enter the unit of measure for the quantity received.
  • Received Qty: (Mandatory) Enter the quantity of PNs being received.
  • Received Date: (Mandatory). The current date is populated by default.
  • Receiving User: The current user is populated by default.
  • Receiving Dept: Select the department that received the PN from the drop-down menu.
  • Remark: Add any additional comments.

3. Select Save to finish or Cancel to abort.


Note: Items in pending status do not have a Receive# assigned. If an item is in pending status, the Receive# field will remain blank.

The cycle counts/QOH(Qty on Hand) will increase after the receive parts process.

Edit Receive Parts

To edit received parts:

1. From the Receive Parts sub-module page, select an entry from the list. The Edit function displays.

2. Select Edit. The Edit Receive Parts pop-up window appears.

3. Update associated field then select Save or Cancel.

Figure 16: Edit Receive Parts Pop-up Window

Figure 38- Edit Receive Parts Pop-up Window.png

 

 

 



Issue Parts  Issue parts icon.png

The Issue Parts submodule is used to dispatch parts in and out of the manufacturing system. Parts may be removed from the system due to poor quality (poor quality parts are scrapped or refurbished); or dispatched into production. Issue Parts and Cycle Counts are connected submodules; as parts are issued, inventory in the cycle count is reduced to reflect the transaction. From the Issue Parts sub-module page, users can search/filter the listing; or add, edit, or export issue parts data.

 


Search/Filter Issue Parts

  1. Users may search according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the Issue PartsSubmodule:
  • Issue #: Issue numbers are generated automatically once the issues parts record moves to completed status.
  • Part Number: Drop-down menu allows the user to search more selectively by Part Number, Part Name, MFG PN, or AVL PN.
  • Received Date From/Received Date To: Use the provided calendars to enter the time span during which parts were issued.
  • Status: Drop-down menu includes: Pending/Completed/Cancelled.

Note: By default, Pending status will be selected as a filtering option. To view Issue Parts records in Completed or Cancelled statuses, select the desired category from the top menu bar and select the search icon (e.g. magnifying glass).

  • SubInventory:
  • Receiving Dept
  1.    Select filtering option(s).
  2. Choose the search icon(e.g. magnifying glass).

 


Add Issue Parts

To add an entry to the Issue Parts page:

  1. Select ADD ISSUE PARTS from the menu. The Add Issue Partspop-up window appears.
  2. Complete the fields provided: (Refer to the Glossary of Terms for more information)
  • Part Number: (Mandatory) Drop-down menu provides a list of part numbers to further limit the search: Part Number, Part Name, MFG PN, or AVL PN.
  • Sub Inventory: (Mandatory) Scroll sub inventory locations with the drop-down menu provided.
  • Locator: (Mandatory) Scroll locators (buildings) with the drop-down menu provided.
  • Location: Drop-down menu provides a list of buildings and floors in a tree format.
  • Production Line: Enter the number or name of the production line the machine associated with the issued PNoperates
  • Asset: Select the Asset(machine) to which the PN is associated.
  • Shift: Enter the shift during which the part was issued, if applicable.
  • Confirmed By: Name of the employee issuing the PN
  • Reason: (Mandatory) Choose Poor Quality or Issued to Production.
  • WO#: If the Part is being rebuilt, enter the Work Order number assigned to the task.
  • Status:(Mandatory)Pending/Completed
  • Qty Uom: PN’s quantity Unit of Measure
  • Issued Qty: (Mandatory)
  • Receiver: (Mandatory)
  • Received Date: (Mandatory)Add the date the PN was received.
  • Vendor: (Mandatory) Choose the Vendorfrom the drop-down menu. Only vendors associated with the given part are available for selection.
  • Currency: The type of currency according to country. The Currency field automatically populates based on the part number selected.
  • Unit Cost: The Unit Cost field populates based on the PN selected.
  • Source Type:(Mandatory) Select from the drop-down list. Options include: Internal or External. 
    • External: Refers to items manufactured by an outside vendor.
    • Internal: Refers to items manufactured within the parent company.
  • Source: The company or department that supplies the part based on External or Internal selection. Utilize the drop-down menu to select the desired source. 
  • Current User: The current user is displayed by default. Alternatively, users may select another user from the drop-down menu.
  • Receiving Dept: The department where the part will be issued. Select the department from the drop-down list; the list is displayed in tree format.
  • Description: Provide any extra information that might be helpful to plant personnel.

Figure 17: Add Issue Parts Pop-up Window

RTENOTITLE

Note: The cycle counts/QOH(Qty on Hand) will decrease after the issue parts process.

 

Edit Issue Parts

To edit issue parts:

  1. From the Issue Parts page, select an entry from the list.
  2. Select Edit
  3. The Edit Issue Parts pop-up window displays.
  4. Edit any of the fields provided as needed:
  5. Select Save to finish or Cancel to abort.

Note: By default, Pending status will be selected as a filtering option. To view Issue Parts records in Completed or Canceled statuses, select the desired category from the top menu bar and select the search icon (e.g. magnifying glass).

Figure 26: Edit Issue Parts

RTENOTITLE

 


Return Parts Return parts icon.png

Return Parts submodule is used to record those parts sent back to the vendor. Changes in the Return Partssubmodule are reflected in the Cycle Countinventory. In the Return Partsmodule, users can search/filter, add, edit,or exportinformation about returned parts.

 

Search/Filter Return Parts

 1.Users may search according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the Return PartsSubmodule:

  • RTV# (Return to Vendor)
  • Receive#
  • Returned Date From
  • Returned Date To
  • Status

 2.Select filtering options.

3. Choose the search icon (e.g. magnifying glass).

Figure 19: Return Part Main Menu 

Figure 46- Return Part Main Menu.png

 

Add Return Parts

To Return a received part:

  1. Select the Receive Part from the list of entries by activating the checkmark.

Note: Only parts in received status may be returned. If a complete list is not available, the status filter may have been applied. Users may need to refresh the screen to view parts in all status conditions.

  1. Select the Add icon
  2. A pop-up window displays (Add Return Parts), allowing the user to select the received part(s).
  3. Complete all fields provided:
  • Receive#: (Mandatory)Number assigned to the part being returned: choose from the list available in the drop-down menu. Note: Recieve numbers are generated automatically after the return parts record moves to completed status.
  • Returned Qty: # of parts being returned to vendor (Mandatory)
  • Qty Uom: The Qty Uomfield automatically populates based on the part number. Qty refers to the part’s unit of measure, or how the part is packaged. For example, EA (each) defines the part as a separate item. Qty Uom is plant-specific based on part size, shape, and packaging. 
  • Returned By: Identify the person completing the return (Mandatory)
  • Returned Date: Choose the date the part is to be returned from the drop-down calendar (Mandatory)'
  • Status: Enter the status of the return: (e.g. pending; or completed) (Mandatory)
  • Remark: Enter any additional information in the textbox provided (Optional)

 6. Select Save to finish or Cancel to abort.

Note: If the system will not accept a return, it is possible the part has already been returned. Navigate to the Receive module to check the part's history.

Figure 28: Add Return Parts

RTENOTITLE

 

Edit Return Parts

  1. After Return Parts are added, they can similarly be edited.
  2. Select an entry from the Return Partslist.
  3. Select Edit. The Edit Return Parts pop-up window displays.
  4. Edit the fields provided
  5.   Select Save to finish or Cancel to abort.

 

Adjust PartsAdjust parts icon.png

The Adjust Parts submodule is used to record any discrepancies in the actual number of parts recorded in the CMMS system. 

In the Adjust Parts submodule, users can search/filter, add, or edit data.

Figure 21: Adjust Parts

Figure 50- Main Menu- Adjust Parts.png
 

Search/Filter Adjust Parts

  1. Users may search for Adjust Parts entries according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the Adjust Parts Submodule:
  • Adjust# Search by the number assigned to the Adjust Parts entry. Note: This number is automatically assigned when the entry is created.
  • Part Number: A drop-down menu is available.
  • SubInventory: Select the sub inventory using the drop-down menu.
  • Update Date From/Update Date To: Select the time span the parts were adjusted by populating the drop-down calendars.
  • Status: Search by the status of the adjusted Parts record: Pending, Rejected, or Cancelled.
  1. Select filtering option(s).
  2. Choose the search icon (e.g. magnifying glass).

Add Adjust Parts

To add an entry to Adjust Parts:

  1. Select Add from the Adjust Parts menu. 
  2. The Add Adjust Parts pop-up window displays.
  3. Complete the provided fields:

 

  • Part Number (Mandatory) Select the PN from the drop-down list
  • Sub Inventory (Mandatory) Select the Sub Inventory from the drop-down list
  • Locator (Mandatory)
  • Qty Uom (Optional)
  • System Qty: This field is automatically populated when the user selects the location(s)
  • Actual Qty: (Mandatory)
  • Approved By: (Mandatory)Select the administrator with approval permissions from the drop-down menu. Note: Approvers are added to the system within the CMMS Admin portal. (Shop Floor Control > Configuration > CMMS Admin > Group > Add User)
  • Status: (Mandatory)Select: Pending, Rejected, or Cancelled
  • Description (Optional)
  1. Select Save to finish or Cancel to abort.

Figure 22: Add Adjust Parts

RTENOTITLE

 

Edit Adjust Parts

To editan Adjust Partsentry:

  1. Select an entry from the Adjust Partspage. The Editfunction is now available.
  2. Select Edit. The Edit Adjust Partspop-up window displays.
  3. Complete the provided fields.

Note: Fields are the same as those configured in the Add Adjust Partsfunction:

 4. Select Save to complete or Cancel to abort.

Note: 1. The approver cannot be the person who requests this adjustment.

 2. Only the creator and approver can edit the requested adjustment.'

 

 


SubinventorySubinventory icon.png

The Subinventorysubmodule of Spare Parts is useful for managing sites that house parts at multiple locations. In the Subinventorysubmodule, users can addand editsub inventory locations; and mark sub inventory locations as Active/Inactive.

Add Subinventory

To add an entry:

  1. Select Add from the Subinventory menu. The Add Subinventorypop-up window displays.
  2. Complete the fields provided:
  • Name: Assign a title to the sub inventory. (e.g. Shelf 1A; Store#2; Row 4; etc.)
  • Active: Activate the checkbox to assign Active/Inactive status. Active = checked.
  • Description: Add any description that may be helpful to plant personnel.

   3. Select Save to finish or select Cancel to abort.
 

Figure 23: Add Subinventory

RTENOTITLE

 

Edit Sub Inventory

To edit Sub Inventoryentries:

  1. Select an entry from the Sub Inventorylist.
  2. Select Edit from the menu. The Edit Sub Inventory pop-up window appears. This window is comprised of two tabs: Generaland Locator.
  3. Edit any of the fields as needed:
  • Name
  • Active/Inactive [checkmark]
  • Description

 

Edit Sub Inventory: Locator

Within the Locator page, users may change Locator information connected to the selected Sub Inventory.

The following functions can be performed: Add, Edit, Activate/Deactivate, and Export.

Figure 24: Edit Sub Inventory: Locator

RTENOTITLE

 


Add a Locator to the Sub Inventory

  1. Select Add from the Locator tabmenu. The Add Form pop-up window appears.
  2. Complete the provided fields:
  • Name: Assign a title to the location. (e.g. Line 1; Building 3; Floor A; etc.)
  • Active: Activate the checkbox to assign Active/Inactive status. Active is checked.
  • Description: Add any description that may be helpful to plant personnel.

   3. Select Save to complete or Cancel to abort.


Figure 25: Add Locator to Sub Inventory

RTENOTITLE

Edit a Locator in the Sub Inventory

  1. Select an entry from the Locator tab listby activating the checkmark next to the entry.
  2. Select Edit; the Edit Formpop-up window displays.
  3. Edit the provided fields as needed:
  4. Select Save to finish or Cancel to abort.

 

Change Active Status: Menu Bar

Locator Status can alternatively be changed from the Activate/Deactivate Icon located on the top menu bar .

To change the active status: 

  1. Select an entry from the Locator tab listby activating the checkmark next to the entry.
  2. Select the Activate/Deactivate icon.

 

 

 

 


Scrap PartsScrap parts icon.png


Damaged parts that cannot be reused must be removed from the Cycle Count. The Scrap Partssubmodule manages these unusable parts. Scrap Partnumbers are reflected in the Cycle Countsubmodule. Within the ScrapParts submodule, users can perform the following functions: search, add, edit, and export.

Note: Scrap parts action happened at the shop floor, which means it won’t reduce qty again when scraped at Shop Floor, because the qty changed at the time of issuing parts.


Figure 26: Scrap Parts Main Menu

​Figure 59- Scrap Parts Main Menu.png

 

Search/Filter Scrap Parts

    1. Users may search according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the Scrap PartsSubmodule:

  • Scrap #
  • Part Number
  • Scrapped Date From/Scrapped Date To: Drop down calendars allow the user to select the time frame when parts were scrapped.

   2. Select filtering option(s).
   3. Choose the search icon(e.g. magnifying glass).

 

Add Scrap Parts

To add a Scrap Part entry:

  1. Select Add from the Scrap Part menu. The Add Scrapping pop-up menu appears.
  2. Complete the fields provided. Drop-down menus are available to aid some selections.
  • Part Number: (Mandatory) Select the PN from a drop-down menu list.
  • Location: (Optional) Floor or building where the parts are housed. The drop-down menu bar provides a diagram with departments in a tree format.
  • Production Line: (Optional) Production line associated with the scrapped part(s).
  • Asset: (Mandatory) Machinery or equipment the scrap parts are assigned
  • Scrapped Date: (Mandatory) Date the part was removed from the system.
  • Qty Uom: (This field automatically populates) Quantity Unit of Measure.
  • Scrapped Qty: (Mandatory) # of PN being removed from inventory.
  • Currency: (Mandatory)Select the type of currency per country.
  • Unit Cost: (This field automatically populates) Cost per unit.
  • Confirmed By: (Optional)The operator completing the part transfer.
  • Description: (Optional) Additional information that may be useful to plant personnel.

 3. Select Save to finish or Cancel to abort.

Figure 27: Add Scrap Parts

RTENOTITLE

Edit Scrap Parts

To edit Scrap Partentries:

  1. Select an entry from the Scrap Partslist by activating the checkmark next to the line of data.
  2. Select Edit. The Edit Scrapping pop-up window appears.
  3. Edit the fields as needed from the preceding Add Scrap Partsaction:
  4. Select Save to finish or Cancel to abort.

 

Reuse Parts Reuse parts icon.png

Previously scrapped parts that have been refurbished for use and moved back into active inventory are managed within the Reuse Partssubmodule.

Note: Activity within the Reuse Partssubmodule is reflected in the Cycle Countsubmodule; adding a shelved part to the Reusecategory increases inventory in Cycle Count.

On the Reuse Partspage, users can perform the following functions: search,add, edit, and export.

Figure 28: Reuse Parts Menu Bar

Figure 63- Reuse Parts Menu Bar.png


Search/Filter Resue Parts

  1. Users may search according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the Reuse Partssubmodule:
  • New PN: Drop-down menu offers additional choices: Part Number, MFG PN, or AVL MFG.
  • Old PN: Drop-down menu offers additional choices: Part Number, MFG PN, or AVL MFG.
  • Status: Drop-down calendar offers additional choices: Pending, Completed, or Cancelled.
  • Reuse#: Enter the quantity of Reused partsassociated with the PN
  • Updated Date From/Updated Date To: Drop-down calendar is available.

     2. Select filtering option(s).
     3. Choose the search icon(e.g. magnifying glass).

 

Add Reuse Parts

To add a Reused Partentry:

  1. Select ADD REUSE PARTS from the Reused Parts menu. The Add Reuse Partspop-up menu displays.
  2. Enter the Old PNor choose from the list of Part Numbersprovided in the drop-down menu.
  3. Additional fields are populated by selecting a PN.

Figure 29: Add Reuse Parts Drop-down Menu
RTENOTITLE

     4. Complete the fields provided. Drop-down menus are available to aid some selections.
     5. Mandatory fields are Sub Inventoryand Locator.

  • New PN: (Mandatory field) Select the new PN to assign to the refurbished part
  • Old PN: (Mandatory field) Select the PN assigned to the original part from the drop-down menu
  • Sub Inventory (Mandatory field)
  • Locator (Mandatory field)
  • Production Line
  • Repaired By
  • Confirmed By
  • Qty Uom
  • Reused Qty(Mandatory field)
  • Vendor Currency (Mandatory field)
  • Unit Price
  • Cost Saving(Mandatory field)
  • Status:(Mandatory field) Choose Pendingor Completed.
  • Description

     6. Select Save to finish or Cancel to abort.

 

Edit Reuse Parts

To edit entries:

  1. Select an entry from the Reuse Partslist.
  2. Select Edit. The Edit Reuse Partspop-up window appears.
  3. Users may edit the fields associated with a given Part Number:
  4. Select Save to finish or Cancel to abort.

 

 


Cycle Count CMMS cycle count.png

The Cycle Count submodule provides a paperless solution for the inventory process. Cycle counts are completed on a regular basis (e.g. daily, weekly, every third Monday, etc.) as determined by the needs of the plants. Within Cycle Count, employees count and record their plant’s machine parts. Cycle counts are always completed based upon the sub-inventory locations where machine parts are located within the manufacturing plant. Administrators can restrict access to approved users to control inventory costs.'

From the Cycle Count page, users can perform the following functions: search, add, operate, delete, and export.

 

Search/Filter Cycle Count

A list of all Plan Items (Planned Cycle Counts) displays. Plan Items are listed by the name designated.

Figure 30: Cycle Count Menu Bar

Figure 67- Cycle Count Menu Bar.png

 

Users may limit their search with the following filter options, located on the screen’s top menu:

  • Plan Name: Search by the Plan Name’s Title.
  • Approve By: A drop-down menu allows the user to select Plan Names according to the employee who approved the Plan Item. NOTE: The “Approve By”column in the Cycle Countpage refers to the user authorized to approve the cycle count. Typically, this user will hold an administrative position.
  • Status: Search for the Plan Name by its status. A drop-down menu offers the following choices:
    • Planned
    • Opening
    • Planned Items Generated
    • Closed

 

Add Cycle Count

Here, Users create the general parameters for their cycle count and create a name for the Cycle Count.Note: The actual tallying process is not completed in this field. Only the Cycle count plan name and parameters are selected here.

To add a Cycle Count entry:
  1. Select Add from the Cycle Countmenu bar. The Add Cycle Count pop-up window displays.
  2. Complete the fields provided. Drop-down menus are available to aid some selections.
  • Plan Name: (Mandatory) Enter a Title for the inventory being counted. Plan Name is based on the location of the items being counted (i.e. Floor #1)
  • Max Locators Per Item: (Mandatory) Enter the total number of physical locations within the subinventory where the parts to be counted reside (e.g. If parts being counted are located on 3 shelves in Building 1; and 2 shelves in Building 2, the Max Locator = 5).
  • Approved By: (Mandatory) Select the supervisor who will approve the cycle count after it is completed.NOTE: The employee who creates the cycle count cannot select himself as the Approverfor that cycle count.
  • Description: (Optional) Add any other directions needed to complete the cycle count.

     3. Select Save to finish or Cancel to abort.

Figure 31: Add Cycle Count

RTENOTITLE

Edit Cycle Count

After users define a plan, they may edit the Cycle Count and begin the inventory process. To edit Cycle Count Plan:

  1. Select an entry from the Plan Name list.
  2. Select Edit from the top menu bar menu. The Edit Cycle Count pop-up window displays. . The Edit Cycle Countwindow is comprised of the following tabs: General, Sub Inventory, and Plan Items.
  3. User may edit  the fields as needed completed when the Cycle Count Plan was originally added to the system.

 

Edit Cycle Count: Plan Items

The Plan Items page is the powerhouse of the Cycle Counts submodule. Within the Plan Items page, cycle counts are recorded and approved. Here, users can edit plan items, create a plan item, approve plan items, export plan items, or delete plan items.

Figure 32: Actions available in Edit Cycle Count: Plan Items Tab
RTENOTITLE

  1. ToCreate a Plan Item:
  • Choose the Add icon.
  • A message window displays, allowing users to confirm the action.
  • Choose Yes to create a plan item or No to cancel the action.
  • A new Plan Item with the predefined parameters will display on the list page. 

Note: Plan Items can only be created from Plans in Opening or Planned status.

Note: Users must first assign a Sub Inventory to a Plan Item before the system allows them to Create a Plan Item.

         2. Edit a Plan Item: Whereas previous Cycle Count tabs are used to configure Cycle Count information, the Edit feature is used to execute a cycle count, and is comprised of four subtabs:General, Locators, Cycle Count, and Adjust In/Out. Some of the tabs need to be completed in a specific order (see notes below). TheEdit feature allows users to adjust quantities (Cycle Count), approve cycle counts (Adjust In/Out), and export locator details (Locators).

 

Edit Plan Items : Locators

Within the Locators page, users can export information about a selected Locatorand its corresponding Sub Inventory in a .csv file onto their local drives.

To Export:
  1. Mark the entry by activating the checkbox next to the line of information.
  2. Select the Export function.
  3. Information will automatically download in a .csv file onto the user’s local drive.
  4. Users may open the file, rename, save, share, or print as desired.

Figure 33: Edit Cycle Count:  Plan Items export Locators

Figure 33- Edit Cycle Count- Plan Items export Locators.png

Edit Plan Items: Cycle Count Items 

Within the Cycle Count Items page users complete the inventory process. Users can:

  1. Search for a Cycle count according to its status: Planned/Completed
  2. Export a .csv file of Cycle Count details onto their local drive to print, share or save. Plants may use this feature to print a hard copy of the items for inventory, and tally using traditional pen and paper in the physical location.

Figure 34: Edit Plan Item: Cycle Count Menu

RTENOTITLE

 

If additional part numbers not specified in the original Plan Item require counting, users may add them to the Plan Item using theAdd feature.

  1. To Add Part Numbers to a Cycle Count Item:
  • Select the Plan Item by highlighting the entry.
  • Choose the Add icon from the top menu bar.
  • This choice activates a pop-up window: Add Cycle Count Item(see Figure, below)
  • Complete the fields provided:
    • Part Number
    • Locator (Note: Only the  Sub Inventory/Locatorsdefined in the Plan Item are available for selection).
    • Actual Qty
    • Qty Uom: (Quantity Unit of Measure) This field automatically populates when Part Number is selected.

Note:All fields are mandatory.

  • Select SAVE to add the Cycle Count Item or CANCEL to cancel.

Figure 35: Add Cycle Count Item
RTENOTITLE
     

     

  1. To Edit the Cycle Count:
  • Activate the checkmark next to the SubInventory to be counted.
  • Select the Edit button from the toolbar to open the Edit Cycle Count Items sub-page
  • Input the data at the Actual Qty text field.
  • Select SAVE.

 

  1. To Submit the Cycle Count:
  • Activate the checkmark next to the SubInventory to be counted.
  • Select the Submit button from the toolbar.

 

Edit Plan Items: Adjust In/Out

Within the Adjust In/Out sub-page, operators enter the actual quantity of parts being counted/inventoried for the selected Plan Item, or make a quantity adjustment using the Edit Tab.

Figure 36: Adjust In/Out

RTENOTITLE

 

  1. To enter cycle countquantity:
  • Select the Location of the parts being counted by highlighting the line of information.
  • Choose the Edit function.
  • A pop-up window displays: Edit Adjust In/Out(Figure, below)
  • Enter the quantity of the item using the Actual Qtydrop-down menu bar.
  • Select Save to complete or Cancel to abort.


Figure 37: Edit Adjust In/Out

RTENOTITLE

Note: Once all inventory is recorded, the new totals are reflected in the list (See Actual Qtyand System Qtylines in Figure, below.)

     

      2. Approve a Cycle Count: This is the most important feature of the Cycle Count submodule. There are several prerequisites that apply:

  • Only users assigned “Approver” may approve a cycle count. TheApprove by feature in the top menu bar will be deactivated if an unapproved user is working in the system.
  • Users may not assign themselves to approve aCycle Count. (Usually, the operator creates the cycle count and assigns the approver at the same time, selecting his/her supervisor as the approver.
  • ***Quantities must be updated and saved in the Cycle Count Items tab before they are available for approval in the Adjust In/Out Tab. The two steps cannot be completed in the opposite order.

     4. To approve the Cycle Count Quantity:

  • Highlight the Plan Name.
  • Select the Approve button and choose Enter.
  • A success message displays

Note: Once approved, the approve button will again be deactivated and the Approver’s name will display in the Approve Column.

 

Delete Cycle Count

  To delete a cycle count

  1. Select an entry from the Plan Name list.
  2. Select Delete from the top menu bar menu. 
  3. Select YES to confirm or NO to abort.

Inventory ViewInventory view icon.png 

Inventory View allows users to conduct inspections of the various part numbers according to the exact location in the plant.

Note:This submodule is view only,

Figure 38: Inventory View Main Menu Bar

''RTENOTITLE''

 

Search/Filter Inventory View

Users may limit their search by choosing from the following filter options:

  • Sub Inventory: Select the Sub Inventory using the drop-down menu bar.
  • Locator: Select the Locator using the drop-down menu bar.
  • Part Number: Select the Part Number using the drop-down menu bar.
  • Part Name: Enter the Part Name.
  • Model: Enter the Model.

Users may view additional information about the Part Numbers selected, and their status in the manufacturing process.

 

  1. Select the entry from the list by highlighting the desired line of information.
  2. A toolbar displays on the top portion of the screen, allowing users to view the following additional information associated with the part number selected: Alternative Parts, Return to Vendors

Alternative Parts

Within the Alternative Parts page users may view the following information associated with the part number selected:

  • Part Number
  • Part Name
  • Qty
  • Qty Uom
  • Max Inventory
  • Minimum Inventory
  • Safe Inventory


Return to Vendors 

Within the Return to Vendors page users may view the following information associated with the part number selected:

  • RTV#
  • Receive #
  • Part Number
  • Sub Inventory
  • Locator
  • Returned Date
  • Returned By
  • Returned Qty
  • Qty Uom

 


Transfer Parts CMMS Transfer Parts .png

The Transfer Parts submoduleallows plants to transfer parts between sub-inventories and locations. Within this portal, users may search/filterfor specific parts; addtransfer parts; edittransfer parts; or exporttransfer part information to a local drive.

Figure 39: Transfer Parts Main Menu

Figure 86- Transfer Parts Main Menu.png

Search/Filter Transfer Parts

  1. Users may search for a specific part according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the Transfer Parts Submodule:
  • Created Date From/Created Date To: Drop-down calendar menus allow users to search for Part Numbers according to the time period they were received in the system.
  • Part Number: Drop-down menu allows the user to further limit the search according to: AVL PNand MFG PN.Users may also scroll the list provided in the drop-down menu.
  • Status: Drop-down calendar allows the user to choose: Pending, Completed, Cancelled.
  • From Sub Inventory
  • From Location
  • To Sub Inventory
  • To Location

     2. Select filtering options.
     3. Choose the search icon(e.g. magnifying glass).
     4. Selected information is now in the list below the top menu bar.

 

Add Transfer Parts

To add a new Transfer Partsentry:

  1. Select Add from the Transfer Partsmenu bar. The Add Transfer Partspop-up menu appears.
  2. Complete the fields provided. Drop-down menus are available to aid some selections.
  • Part Number
  • From Sub Inventory
  • From Locator
  • To Sub Inventory
  • To Locator
  • Transfer Qty
  • Qty UOM
  • Status: Pending, Completed
  • Comment   

 ​Note: Sub Inventories and Locations are associated with part numbers in the Part List submodule of Spare Parts. If the desired Sub Inventory or Locator is not available from the drop-down list return to thePart List >Part Number > Edit > Sub Inventory & Locator Tab.

     4. Select Save to finish, or Cancel to abort.

Figure 40: Add Transfer Parts

RTENOTITLE

 

Edit Transfer Parts

To edita Transfer Partentry:

  1. Select an entry from the Transfer Partslist.
  2. Select Edit. The Edit Transfer Partspop-up window appears.
  3. The following fields are available for edit: Locator; Sub Inventory; and Status.

Note: Users may select a different part from the drop-down menu and change sub inventory and locator.

 

 

 


Transaction Logs CMMS Transaction Logs .png 

The Transaction Log submoduleallows plants toviewthe activity of part numbers actively being moved within the system. All transactions completed inReceive Parts, Return Parts, or Transfer Partsare available. Received parts may be moved within the Transaction Log module. All other transaction types are view only.

Figure 58: Transaction Logs Main Menu

Figure 89- Transaction Logs Main Menu.png

Search/Filter Transaction Logs

  1. Users may search for part numbers by selecting any of the criteria located on the top menu bar of the Transaction LogsSubmodule:
  • Part Number: Drop-down menu allows the user to further limit search: AVL; PN;  MFG PN
  • Sub Inventory
  • Locator
  • Transaction Date From/Transaction Date To
  • Transaction Type Drop-down menu allows the user to further limit the search: Receive Parts; Issue Parts; Return Parts; Adjust Parts; Reuse Parts; Sub Inv Transfer

     2. Select filtering options.
     3. Choose the search icon(e.g. magnifying glass).

     4. The selected entries are now displayed in list form beneath the top menu bar.

View Transaction Logs

  1. To view:
  • Highlight the data in the list.
  • Double click on the highlighted entry.
  • A text box displays that shows complete transaction details of the selected Part Number.

 

 

 

 


Purchase Request CMMS Purchase Request.png

Within the Purchase Request submodule, plants build Purchase Requests to order new parts for their equipment. Users may search; create; or edit PRs (Purchase Requests). Multiple screens within this submodule provide a work area for users to record and adjust order details, thus eliminating the need for paper scratch pads.

Figure 42: Procurement Workbench Main Menu

'Figure 91- Purchase Request Main Menu.png'


Search/Filter Procurement Workbench

  1. Users may search according to the following criteria, located on the top menu bar of the Purchase Request submodule:
  • Part Number: Scroll entries with the available drop-down menu or type the Part Numberin the field.
  • Status: Drop-down menu limits the search by: New, Approved, Closed, or Canceled.

      2. Select filtering option(s).
      3. Choose the search icon(e.g. magnifying glass).

Note: To move to the next page of part numbers: type a page number in the scroll bar at the bottom of the drop-down menu and select enter on the keyboard.

Create Purchase Request

To Create a Suggested PR Purchase Request:

  1. Select the Add icon.
  2. A message screen displays. 
  3.  Choose Yes to create a PR, or No to cancel the activity.
  4.  The system assigns a new PR Batch#, and the entry now displays on the list below the main menu.

Note: The following information displays in blue text on the top of the menu bar: (Stockable & Status(Active)&Source Type(External)&Reused Flag(False)And Qty(QOH+In Transit Qty) is lower than Safety Stock).

  1. This information details the prerequisites required to create a suggested Purchase Request (PR). Only part numbers that meet the required prerequisites will be accepted as part of a suggested PR. Following is an explanation of each requirement:
  • Stockable: Parts must be marked as “in stock” to be part of a suggested PR
  • Status(Active): Part Status must be marked “active” to be part of a suggested PR
  • Source Type (External): Only external parts will be accepted as part of a suggested PR
  • Reused Flag (False): Reused parts are not accepted as part of a suggested PR
  • Qty (QOH+In Transit Qty) is lower than Safety Stock: The part’s quantity on hand combined with the part’s quantity in transit (on the way) must be lower than the part’s safety stock in order to be accepted as part of a suggested PR.

Note: Part Number properties are managed within the first submodule of Spare Parts (Part List) under the Editfunction.

Edit Workbench

To edit:

  1. Select an entry from the list by activating the checkbox next to the listing.
  2. Select the Edit icon from the top menu bar.
  3. A new window now displays (Edit Workbench) that provides necessary details and a workspace to build a PR (Purchase Request).

Figure 43: Edit Workbench
RTENOTITLE

 

Edit a Purchase Request

To edit a Purchase Request:

  1. Select a Suggested PR from the list by activating the checkmark next to the line of information.
  2. Select the Edit icon.
  3. Selecting Edit populates data into the side panel and also displays a pop-up window (Edit Purchase Request) that allows the user to change the following elements of the PR:
  • Requester: Select from the drop-down menu
  • Department: (shown in tree format with parent and children departments demarcated)
  • Vendor: (select the vendor from the drop-down menu)
  • Urgent: (activate the checkbox if the change is urgent. Default is not urgent.)
  • Status: Drop-down menu provides choices: New; Approved; Canceled
  • Comment

     4. Select Save to complete, or Cancel to abort the action.

Figure 44: Edit Purchase Request

'RTENOTITLE'
 

PR Items

The Purchase Request submodule provides a workspace (PR Item) where employees can add, edit, or deletePR items associated with a selected Purchase Request (see Figure, below).

For reference purposes, the bottom portion of the screen displays additional information associated with the selected Purchase Request to include: Alternative Parts, Return to Vendor, PRs, and AVLs.
Note: Fields in the bottom portion of the screen are view only.

Figure 45: PR Items available for Edit and View

RTENOTITLE
 

Add PR Items to a Purchase Request

To build a Purchase Request:

  1. Select the Purchase Requestfrom the left-hand side of the Edit Workbenchpage by activating the checkbox next to its listing.
  2. Select the Add icon from the PR Item screenon the right-hand side of the Edit Workbenchpage.
  3. A pop-up window displays: Add PR Item

Figure 46: Add PR Item Pop-up Window

'RTENOTITLE'
     

     4. Select the Part Numberfrom the provided drop-down menu bar.
     5. A table below the part number automatically populatesbased on the Part Number selection.
     6. The following data is available for reference/viewonly:

  • Vendor
  • Currency
  • Current Price
  • Lead Time

     7. Complete the Order Qty: Select the quantity of parts to order with the drop-down menu barprovided.
     8. Select Delivery Date: Select the delivery date with the drop-down calendarprovided. NOTE: A delivery date is automatically populatedbased on Part Number availability; however, users may change delivery date as needed.
     9. Select Saveto add the Part number to the selected Purchase Request or Cancelto abort the action.
     10. Added Part Numbers display in list format within the PR Itemworkspace.
     11. On the bottom portionof the Edit Workbench page, reference information pertaining to the PR Item selected is available for reference. To activate the information, select the PR item by activating the checkmark next to the data entry. Corresponding information in the bottom field will display. The screens are view-only; users may not editthis field. The following information is available:

  • Alternative parts
  • Return to Vendors
  • PRs
  • AVLs

Note: Some fields will be empty, based on Part Number selected.

Edit a PR Item


To Edit a PR Item:

  1. Select the Purchase Request Item by activating the checkbox next to the line of data.
  2. Select the Edit icon.
  3. The Edit PR Itempop-up window displays the same fields as the Add function.
  4. The following fields are available for edit: Order Qty; Delivery Date
  5. Choose Saveto complete the change, or Cancelto discard the action.
  6. Similar to the Add PR Itemwindow, the following information associated with the Part Number is available for referencein a view onlyformat: Vendor; Currency; Current Price; Lead Time

Delete a PR Item

To Delete a PR Item:

  1. Select the Purchase Request Item by activating the checkbox next to the line of data.
  2. Select the Delete icon.
  3. The PR Item will be removed, and no longer display in the PR Item list.

View Alternative Parts Return to Vendors and AVLS

On the bottom portion of the Edit Workbench page, reference information pertaining to the PR Item selected is available for reference. To activate the information, select the PR item by activating the checkmark next to the data entry. Corresponding information in the bottom field will display. The screens are view only; users may not edit this field. The following information is available:

  • Alternative parts
  • Return to Vendors
  • AVLs

 

 

Part CategoryPart category icon.png  

The Part Category submodule assists administrators in organizing their assets’ spare parts. Once parent categories are defined, users can quickly move, count, and purchase multiple parts. Users can link multiple categories to individual spare parts from the Part List submodule/Part Category Tab.

 

Available Features

Users may Add, Edit, or Activate/Deactivate a Part Category within this submodule.

 

Add A Part Category

  1. Select Add
  2. 'The Add Spare Part CategoryForm displays. The following fields are available:
  • *Category:(Mandatory) Add the parent name of the Spare Part Category. (e.g. ICT Parts, Belts, Fixture Parts, Fuji Parts)
  • Description:' (Optional) Add a brief description of the Spare Part Category.
  • *Active:(Mandatory) Check the box to mark the Category as active. The default value is checked (Active). Active fields are denoted by a blue checkmark; inactive fields are denoted by a grey checkmark. 

Figure 47: Add Spare Part Category

RTENOTITLE

 

Edit a Part Category

  1. Select any Part Category by highlighting the entry in the Part Categorylist.
  2. Select Edit.
  3. Any of the fields can be modified.

 

Activate/Deactivate a Part Category

Users may change the status of any part category from active to inactive or inactive to active.

  1. Select the Part Category by highlighting the entry in the Part Category list.
  2. Select Activate/Deactivate.
  3. The Active status reflects the change.